Sei sulla pagina 1di 374

SR500- s

Course Notes, Vol. 2


033-220170-001, Issue 5
These course notes describe
various aspects of the SR500-s
system. They include overview,
basic concepts, station operation,
installation, and related topics. They
are intended as a training aid only
and are designed to supplement
rather than to replace the relevant
SR Telecom documentation.
SR500-s
TDMA Subscriber
Radio System
Technical Training
Course Notes
033-220170-001
Issue 5
June 2002
SRTC-CO1.STY
I nt roduct i on
SR500s Overview
Basi c Concept s
Net work I nt erf aces
St at i on Operat i on
Hardware Settings on SR500-s System
Microwave Pat h Consi derat i ons
Conf i gurat i on Consi derat i ons
Installation Information
Faul t Management
Ref erences
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\INTERCAL. SAM
Issue: 5
Central Station
Operation
Not e:
For more information on the Central Station, please refer to the SR500s
Central Station Field Service Manual. 033-100135-001
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM 5-1
SR500-s Course Notes
5-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM
Cent ral St at i on
Overview
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM 5-3


TX DATA
RX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX CLOCK
ALARMS
CPU BUSSES
F1
F1'
CS-0P2.DS4
SR500 Non Redundant Central Station Simplified Block Diagram
FLAT WIRES
line #1
line #2
line #3
line #4
line #5
line #6
line #7
line #8
TX ENABLE
CDC
CARRIER
DETECT
CENTRAL
STATION
CONTROLLER
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
CENTRAL
STATION
TRANSCEIVER
POWER SUPPLY
(Modular Power System)
-48 VDC
TELEPHONE
EXCHANGE
(CO SWITCH,
PBX ETC.)
4.864 Mbps
4.864 Mbps
AMPHENOL,
WIRE WRAP
or KRONE
CONNECTORS
RSSI
CENTRAL
STATION
LINE SHELVES
PA/
DUPLEXER
Other option: -24 VDC
MDF
SR 500 CENTRAL STATION
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
Clip Guard*
Modular
Power
System
Outbound
Transceiver
Shelf
Line/Data Shelf 1
(CS Line Shelf
Shown)
Line/Data Shelf 7
Terminal Panel 1*
Terminal Panel 2*
Interrack Buffer**
System
Control
Shelf
(Optional)
(Shelf required to interconnect two central station racks)
*
**
Clip Guard*
Line/Data Shelf 4
Interrack Buffer**
Terminal Panel 3*
Terminal Panel 4*
Terminal Panel 5*
Terminal Panel 6*
Line/Data Shelf 5
Line/Data Shelf 6
Line/Data Shelf 2
(CS Line & Data
Shelf Shown)
Line/Data Shelf 3
(CS Data Shelf
Shown)
C
2 3
5 4
8 9 7
5 4
1
6
0
M
Terminal Panel 7*
Line/Data Shelf 8
02-05E.DS4
Front View of a Protected Central Station Equipped With Eight Line/Data Shelves
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM 5-5
Rack Grounding Post
(to station ground)
To Antenna
Rack Grounding Post
(to station ground)
Six 50-pin Amphenol
(RJ21X) connectors serving
as a line shelf VF interface
(also used for connection to
main distribution frame when
optional terminal panels
are not equipped)
(When optional terminal panels are not equipped) *
Dual DC Power Inputs *
Dual AC Power Inputs
Six 50-pin Amphenol
(RJ21X) connectors serving
as a line shelf VF interface
(also used for connection to
main distribution frame when
optional terminal panels are
not equipped)
Two DB25S connectors that
serve as a customer data
interface when a CS data
module is equipped in the
shelf (data channel A - upper
connector, data channel B -
lower connector)
DB25S data connector
serving as a serial dot
matrix printer interface
DB25S data connector
serving as a local video
display terminal interface
DB25S data connector
serving as a modem
interface for remote video
display terminal applications
16 DB25S data connectors
that serve as a customer
data interface (data
channel A - upper connector,
data channel B - lower
connector)
32 DB25S data connectors
that serve as a customer
data interface (data
channel A - upper connector,
data channel B - lower
connector)
Two DB25S data connectors
that serve as a customer
data interface when a CS
data module is equipped in
the shelf (data channel A -
upper connector, data
channel B - lower connector)
Rear View of a Protected Central Station Equipped With Eight Line/Data Shelves
02-06E.DS4
SR500-s Course Notes
5-6 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM
Cent ral St at i on
Modular Power System (MPS)
The modular power system comprises a shelf that holds the power
supplies needed to energise the equipment of a central station (C.S.),
rack-mounted outstation (RMO) or rack-mounted repeater (RMR).
The modular power system can operate from any of the following power
sources:
Option Range
-24 VDC -20 to -36 VDC
-48 VDC -36 to -72 VDC
See FM5-010200-E "SR500-s Field Service Manual" for description,
installation and troubleshooting hints.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM 5-7
TRANSCEIVER
POWERSUPPLY
PWR
ON
ALM
CONTROLLER
POWERSUPPLY
PWR
ON
ALM
CONTROLLER
POWERSUPPLY
PWR
ON
ALM
TRANSCEIVER
POWERSUPPLY
PWR
ON
ALM
TEST&ALARM
MODULE
OUT. RTN
+5V
-5V
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+15V
+25V
-48V
CLK
S1
S2
IN. RTN
PS
ACO
CIRCUITBREAKER
POWERON
SOURCE
CIRCUITBREAKER
POWERON
SOURCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Unscrew
to remove
module
MPS-01EN.DS4 SR500 Modular Power System
RED
AlarmLED
indicates
assembly in
alarm
Source LED
indicates
input voltage
presence
Alarm
cut-off
Test
points
Transceiver power supply module(s)
powers t ransceiver shelf
Cont roller power supply module(s)
powers cont rol, line and dat a shelves
SR500-s Course Notes
5-8 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM
Back Panel Connectors
SOURCE 2
GND GND
SOURCE 1
INTERRACK
BUFFER
J19 J20
J
1
3
J
1
8
L1
TCL2
J21
TCL1
J22
5V
REMSENSE
J23
C1
AC2
J36
AC1
J37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
J24 J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31
J32 J33 J34 J35
J38 J39 J40 J41
J42
J44
CUSTOMER
ALARMS
J43
P/S FAIL
ALARM
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
TB & RNG
MODULAR POWER SYSTEM
1 1
L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S
TX - RX
1 1 1 1
1
MPS-02.DS4
Barrier Strips (J13 & J18) - connect up to two DC power sources to the
modular power system. Both power sources must deliver identical output
voltages, either -24 or -48 VDC. J13 and J18 also serve to connect the
optional external battery pack(s).
Interrack Buffer Outputs (J19 & J20) - deliver power to the interrack
buffer shelves on the central station. Connector J19 delivers power to the
shelf on the auxiliary central station rack and J20 to the shelf on the main
central station rack.
TCL1 (J22) & TCL2 (J21) - deliver power to the plug-in modules of the
station's control shelf. Connector J21 delivers power to the standby
modules (in right-hand side of control shelf) and J22 to the main modules
(in left-hand side of control shelf).
5 V Remote Sense (J23) - monitors the +5 VDC output at a remote point,
typically the line or data shelf located furthest away from the modular
power system.
L/S 1 to 8 (J24 to J31) - each connector delivers power to one line shelf,
to one data shelf, or to one line/data shelf.
TX - RX (J32 to J35) - each pair of connectors delivers power to one
transceiver shelf. The latter could be housing transceivers, NEMs, or a
combination of the two. (i.e. RMR)
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM 5-9
Back Panel Connectors (continued)
SOURCE 2
GND GND
SOURCE 1
INTERRACK
BUFFER
J19 J20
J
1
3
J
1
8
L1
TCL2
J21
TCL1
J22
5V
REMSENSE
J23
C1
AC2
J36
AC1
J37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
J24 J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31
J32 J33 J34 J35
J38 J39 J40 J41
J42
J44
CUSTOMER
ALARMS
J43
P/S FAIL
ALARM
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
TB & RNG
MODULAR POWER SYSTEM
1 1
L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S
TX - RX
1 1 1 1
1
MPS-02.DS4
AC1 (J37) & AC2 (J36) - connect up to two AC power sources to the
modular power system. Both power sources must deliver identical output
voltages, either 120 or 240 VAC.
TB & RNG (J38 to J41) - each connector delivers talk battery and ringing
voltages to one line shelf or to one line/data shelf on a rack-mounted
remote station.
J42 (summed alarm) - reports the status of the modular power system to
the system control shelf (on central stations) or to the controller module (on
remote stations).
CUSTOMER ALARMS (J44) - each pair of terminals on connector J44 is
an input for a customer-defined alarm. Up to four such alarms can be
connected to a modular power system on a rack-mounted remote station.
(The central station does not handle customer alarms.)
The alarmed state, normally closed or normally open, of each customer
alarm is set on the test & alarm module.
P/S FAIL ALARM (J43) - provides a dry-contact output to extend the
alarm associated with the modular power system to a remote
alarm-monitoring centre.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-10 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM
Cent ral St at ion (CS) Conf igurat ion
DC POWER SOURCE (-24 or -48 VDC)
CS
Configuration
Plug-In Position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Unprotected T-R Ctrl TA CB
Unprotected with more than
4 shelves
T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA CB
Unprotected with UDI Shelf T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA CB
Protected T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA CB CB
Protected with more than 4
shelves
T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl TA CB CB
Protected with UDI Shelf T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl TA CB CB
AC POWER SOURCE (120 or 240 VAC)
Unprotected
T-R Ctrl TA Ac-Dc
Unprotected with more
than 4 shelves
T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA Ac-Dc
Unprotected with UDI
Shelf
T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA Ac-Dc
Protected T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA Ac-Dc Ac-Dc
Protected with more
than 4 shelves
T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl TA Ac-Dc Ac-Dc
Protected with UDI
Shelf
T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl TA Ac-Dc Ac-Dc
1
UDI is the abbreviation for universal digital interface.
Legend:
Ac-Dc AC to DC Converter TA Test & Alarm Module
CB Circuit Breaker Module TbRs Talk Battery & Ringing Supply
Ctrl Controller Power Supply T-R Transceiver Power Supply
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM 5-11
Circuit Breaker Module (e.g. SD512660) - Simplified Block Diagram
-24 VDC nom.
-18 VDC to-36VDC
or
-48 VDC nom
-36 VDC to -72VDC.
MODPS4.DS4
DC
Breaker
OPT 001 - 48 VDC INPUT
OPT 002
- 24 VDC INPUT
Yellow
LED
Green
LED
-24 VDC nom.
-18 VDC to-36VDC
or
-48 VDC nom
-36 VDC to -72VDC.
+14 VDC nom.
+12VDC to +18VDC
For Power Supply logic
e.g comparators, alarms, etc
Voltage
Regulator
Voltage
Regulator
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
512660ISS1
CIRCUITBREAKER
A
A
CIRCUIT BREAKER
POWER ON
SOURCE
512660CB.DS4
Front View and Component Layout of Circuit Breaker Module (e.g. SD512660)
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
3
Controller Power Supply Module (e.g. SD512650) - Simplified block diagram
-5.0 Volts 4.0 A.
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
DC
Breaker
MOV
Transient
Suppressor
PTC
+OUT
-OUT
+SENSE
-SENSE
TRIM
+IN
-IN
+OUT
-OUT
+SENSE
-SENSE
TRIM
+IN
-IN
OUT
+OUT
-OUT
+SENSE
-SENSE
TRIM
+IN
-IN
+5.1 Volts 10 A.
Used for
Alarm
Used for
Alarm
Used for
Alarm
+12 Volts 4.0 A.
-12 Volts 4.0 A.
Gate IN Gate Out
Gate IN Gate Out
Gate IN Gate Out
IN
OPT 001 - 48 VDC INPUT
OPT 002
- 24 VDC INPUT
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
MODPS2.DS4
250 sec
Turn On
Delay
DC
Fuse
3A/6A
DC
Fuse
3A/6A
DC
Fuse
3A/6A
25 sec.
Turn On
Delay
250 sec
Turn On
Delay
-24 VDC nom.
-18 VDC to-36VDC
or
-48 VDC nom
-36 VDC to -72VDC.
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
6 6 6
6
6 6 6
J1
CONTROLLER
POWER SUPPLY
PWR
ON
ALM
512650CP.DS4 Front View and Compnent Layout of Controller Power Supply Module (e.g. SD512650)
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
5

Transceiver Power Supply Module (e.g. SD512655) - Simplified Block Diagram
-24 VDC nom.
-18 VDC to-36VDC
or
-48 VDC nom
-36 VDC to -72VDC.
+25 Volts 1.25 A.
T
R
A
N
S
C
E
I
V
E
R
MODPS1.DS4
DC
Fuse
3A/6A
DC
Breaker
MOV
Transient
Suppressor
PTC
+OUT
-OUT
+SENSE
-SENSE
TRIM
+IN
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
-IN
DC
Fuse
3A/6A
+OUT
-OUT
+SENSE
-SENSE
TRIM
+IN
-IN
DC
Fuse
3A/6A
+OUT
-OUT
+SENSE
-SENSE
TRIM
+IN
-IN
DC
Fuse
3A/6A
+OUT
-OUT
+SENSE
-SENSE
TRIM
+IN
-IN
+5.1 Volts (SLIM) or
+6.0 Volts (Phase 1)
2.5 A.
Used for
Alarm
Used for
Alarm
Used for
Alarm
Used for
Alarm
+12 Volts (SLIM) or
+15 Volts (Phase 1)
4.0 A.
-5.1 Volts (SLIM) or
-6.0 Volts (Phase 1)
2.5 A.
Gate IN Gate Out
Gate IN Gate Out
Gate IN Gate Out
Gate IN Gate Out
OPT 001
For Phase 1
- 48 VDC INPUT
+/-6 VDC, +15 and +25 OUTPUT
OPT 002
OPT 003
OPT 004
For Phase 1
- 24 VDC INPUT
+/-6 VDC, +15 and +25 OUTPUT
For SLIM
- 48 VDC INPUT
+/-5 VDC, +12 and +25 OUTPUT
For SLIM
- 24 VDC INPUT
+/-5 VDC, +12 and +25 OUTPUT
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
DC/DC
CONVERTER
and FILTER
25 sec.
Turn On
Delay
250 sec
Turn On
Delay
250 sec
Turn On
Delay
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M





C15
GND
+5V
-5V
+25V
+12V
OR
+6V
-6V
OR
OR
+15V
TRANSCEIVER
POWER SUPPLY
PWR
ON
ALM
512655TP.DS4
Front View And Component Layout For Radio Power Supply Module (ex. SD512655)
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
7



Test and Alarm Plug-in Module (e.g. SD512666) - Simplified Block Diagram
MODPS3.DS4
JP5
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
User Defined External Alarm #4
Open Circuit
Closed Circuit
Detector
(isolated by
opto-couplers)
options:
Norm. Open (NO)
Norm. Closed (NC)
using JP1 to JP4
User Defined External Alarm #3
User Defined External Alarm #2
User Defined External Alarm #1
+ V
C
NC
NO
Alarms frommodular power supply modules
will ground this common alarmbus
when an alarmis detected.
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
ACO
Alarm relay
Cut-Off switch
M
O
D
U
L
A
R
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
S
H
E
L
F
B
A
C
K
P
L
A
N
E
+5 VOLTS
-5 VOLTS
+5 VOLTS
-5 VOLTS
+12 VOLTS
-12 VOLTS
+12 VOLTS
+25 VOLTS
-48 VOLTS
RING CLOCK
SOURCE #1
SOURCE #2
INPUT RETURN
OUTPUT RETURN
V ref
(+5 V)
+ V
OPT 001 PHASE 1 (+/-6V, +15V)
OPT 002 SLIM (+/-5V, +12V)
DISABLE
(Tranceiver)
(RMO/RMR only)
(RMO/RMR only)
Alalrm D
Alalrm C
Alalrm B
Alalrm A
-
+
ACO LED
turns on
when ACO
switch is
activated,
will turn off
when alarm
is removed
+12 V
or 0 V
ACO
LED
(Tranceiver)
(Tranceiver)
(Tranceiver)
(RMO/RMR only)
(RMO/RMR only)
(RMO/RMR only)
(RMO/RMR only)



S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
8
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
J1
TEST & ALARM
MODULE
OUT.RTN
+5V
-5V
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+12V
+25V
-48V
CLK
S1
S2
IN.RTN
PS
ACO
512666TA.DS4
Test and Alarm Module (e.g. 512666) - Front View and Component Layout
LED Indicator
for P/S Alarm
Desactivated
J P1
J P3
J P2
J P4
J P5
+
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
A
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
9
Set t ing t he Nonalarmed St at e of Cust omer Alarms
(N.B. Do not apply to the Central Station, only for RMO/RMR)

Jumpers for
setting nonalarmed
state of external
alarms
SNSCA.DS4
SETTING NONALARMED STATE OF CUSTOMER ALARMS
Customer
Alarm
Number
Jumper Setting Nonalarmed State of
Customer Alarm
1 JP1 NC normally closed
NO normally opened
2 JP3 NC normally closed
NO normally opened
3 JP4 NC normally closed
NO normally opened
4 JP2 NC normally closed
(see below) NO normally opened
REPORTING CUSTOMER ALARM 4 or P/S FAIL ALARM
P/S FAIL JP5 ALM4 Customer alarm 4 will report a customer-defined
alarm.
P/S FAIL Customer alarm 4 will report a failure in the
modular power system. Therefore, you should not
connect any wires to the pair of terminals that
correspond to customer alarm 4.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-20 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05A.SAM
Outbound
Transceiver
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
SLIMRFV.DS4
Outbound Transceiver - Front View
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05B.SAM 5-21
SLIM Outbound Transceiver - Simplified Block Diagram
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, +25VDC
MODULAT.
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
PA
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
.1W (+20dB)
XMT MODULE
RCV MODULE
-1.2 dB loss
XMT ALARM
NOTES: NOTES: NOTES: NOTES:
DEPENDING ON PA OPTION DEPENDING ON PA OPTION DEPENDING ON PA OPTION DEPENDING ON PA OPTION
SLIMOUTB.DS4
2
LOW
POWER
AMPLIFIER
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
RCV
FILTER
XMT
FILTER
BURST CONTROL
XMT POWER:
4W (35 dBm)
1W (30 dBm)
0.1W (20 dBm)
RCV POWER:
-92dBm <Prx<-45 dBm
2
INTERCONN.
LO/MOD
TX ENABLE
(BURST CONTROL)
PA
RCV
RF IN
1
1
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
RCV
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
3
FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY
SENSITIVE SENSITIVE SENSITIVE SENSITIVE
3
3
INTERCONN.
LO/LNC
LO OUT
(SMA)
DEMODULATOR
LNC
CD CLEAR
ANALOG CD
RSSI
A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR
GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS
REQUESTED. REQUESTED. REQUESTED. REQUESTED.
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
5V = active TX
0V = standby
NC ALARM
OQPSK IF
70 MHz
-43dBm
+4 dBm
-1.2 dB loss
CIRCULATOR
-0.4 dB loss
OQPSK
+23 dBm
XMT
RF OUT
OQPSK
-93.5 dBm
to
-46.5 dBm
TxFreq.
0 dBm
LO MON (SMA)
Rxfreq. 70 MHz
-10 dbm
5 V
0 V
5 V
0 V
5 V
0 V
5 V
0 V
ND ALARM (OB ONLY)
RF SENSE
DET
BURST I Q STR
+-
+-
LNA
DOWN
CONV.
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
B
.
S
A
M
Module 513390 ("XMT Baseband processor")
DATA
DATA
Jumper Use Position
Module 513325 (synthesizer)
Module 513345 (interconnect)
Module 513410 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 512450 (power amplifier 20 dBm)
(The transmitter is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects burst mode transmission ( for normal operation)
Selects continuous mode transmission ( for testing purpose)
JP2
Selects if transmit data is normal (usual position)
JP8
Selects if transmit frequency > receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit frequency < receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit data is inverted
JP5
Enable the TX clock signal (normal operation)
Open the TX clock path ( for testing purpose)
A
B
Inserted
Removed
TX > RX
TX < RX
JP3,4
JP6,7
Used for factory testing Inserted
SLIMTXOP.DS4
Option Table for SLIM Transmitter #513330 (2.4 GHz)
Set the frequency to the transmit frequency
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
B
.
S
A
M
5
-
2
3
D
Jumper Use Position
Module 513225 (interconnect)
Module 513220 (LNC)
Module 513325 (synthesizer)
(The receiver is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP4 or
JP9
Selects if receive data is normal
Selects if receive data is inverted
SLMORXOP.DS4
D
Module 513215 (OB demodulator)
TX < RX
JP5 or
JP10
Selects if the transmit frequency < receive frequency (Outbound transceiver only)
Selects if the transmit frequency > receive frequency (Outbound transceiver only)
TX > RX
Others
Used for factory testing
Note: The synthesizer frequency must be offset by 70MHz fromthe receive frequency
and away from the transmitter frequency. If Tx <Rx, set the synthesizer to Rx frequency +70 MHz.
If Tx >Rx, set the synthesizer to the Rx frequency -70 MHz.
Option Table for SLIM Outbound Receiver #513230 (2.4 GHz)
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
B
.
S
A
M
SYNTHESIZED
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
Transmitter or Receiver
First digit of
transmit
frequency
is permanently
set to either
1 or 2
2 3 0 6 0 0
JP8
SLIM Outbound Transceiver - Frequency Setting
FIG08E.DS4
Note:
The 1.5 GHz and other
transceivers have only
4 switches. For the
1.5 GHz, the last one is
for the MHz fraction as
per this table: 0 =0.00
2 =0.25
5 =0.50
7 =0.75
Tx Rx
Frequency
Frequency
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0 1
2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1
2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1
2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1
2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1
2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05B.SAM 5-25
TRANSMITTER
JP2
DATA
DATA
DATA
JP2
DATA
SLIM Outbound Transceivers - Option Settings
FIG08B.DS4
JP3
JP4
J
P
1
OUTBOUND RECEIVER
DATA DATA
TX>RX
TX<RX
JP8
J
P
5
J
P
8
TX>RX RX>TX
RSSI ADJ
B
A
USED ON THE INBOUND
TRANSCEIVER ONLY
Data Polarity
Sideband Select
USED ON THE OUTBOUND
TRANSCEIVER ONLY
SR500-s Course Notes
5-26 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05B.SAM
OUTBTRFV.DS4
Outbound Transceiver (PA/Duplexer not shown) - Front View
Tx Rx
XMT OUT
(to P/A Duplexer Module)
L.O. MON
L.O. MON
RCV IN
fromP/A Duplexer
Module
XMT ALARM LED
DC TEST POINTS
DETECTED BURST (DETB)
SYMBOL TIMING RECOVERY (STR)
CARRIER DETECT CLEAR (CDC)
Rx SIGNAL STRENGHT INDICATOR (RSSI)
IN PHASE COMPONENT (I)
QUADRATURE COMPONENT (Q)
ANALOG CARRIER DETECT (ANCD)
RF sense: 5V when it senses that the out put power is within
5 db of the nominal out put power; 0V otherwise.
No Clock (NC), No Data (ND) alarms: 5 V in alarm condition
0 V in normal condition
On the transmitter:
Rx freq. 70MHz

approx. -10 dBm
(Tx freq. approx. 0 dBm)
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05B.SAM 5-27
CDC (time slot timing fromthe controller; rising edges indicate beginning/end of time slots)
ANALOG CD (RXIF envelope)
DET. BURST (burst detection)
5V
5V
T1 T1 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T4 T4 T5 T5 T5 T5 T6 T6 T6 T6 T7 T7 T7 T7
M MM M
B BB B
0 00 0
M MM M
B BB B
1 11 1
Saturation Saturation Saturation Saturation
Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Noise level Noise level Noise level Noise level
aprox.
3-4V
Time Time Time Time
Time Time Time Time
Time Time Time Time
Time Division Multiplexing - Demonstration at the Outbound Transceiver
Notes:
At the Central Station the test point RXFRM (on the CS Timing Module) is used as an external
trigger for the oscilloscope. At a repeater site, TP1on the SLIM controller 513261, TP2 on the
SLIM controller 513260 or TP3 on the RMO/RMR controller may be used as an external trigger.
The last trunks (i.e. T55 to T60, which are more often used) may be monitored
by using the oscilloscope's delayed trigger feature.
MB0 and MB1and Sub-Multiplexed Data Trunks will be flashing (detected and undetected)
depending on their occurrence (a trace will be seen at the top and bottomof the signal).
ANCD2.DS4
(1) (1)
(1) (1)
(1) 50 s (2) 130 s
(2)
(2)
SR500-s Course Notes
5-28 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05B.SAM
RSSI Signal (at the outbound receiver)
The RSSI signal is proportionnal to the RF level detected at the outbound receiver. It is used to
estimate the received level of each station (approx. 5 dB).
The receive level of each station communicating directly with the central station is measured at
the central station. The receive level of each station communicating with a repeater is
measured at the repeater. The measurement is taken during an answer to a station poll.
The following graph is typical of the RSSI signal voltage variation with the received RF level. Note
that the RSSI signal saturates for receive levels greater than -60 dBm(3.5 volts approx.). In
this case, an alternate method (i.e. using a variable attenuator) shall be used to insure that the
receive level is not above the -45 dBmmaximumoperating level for the receiver.
RSSI Voltage
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
-92 -90 -88 -86 -84 -82 -80 -78 -76 -74 -72 -70 -68 -66 -64 -62 -60 -58 -56 -54 -52
Received RF Level (dBm)
R
S
S
I

(
V
d
c
)
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM 5-28-1
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-28-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM
1. 8, 2. 0 or 2. 2 GHz
Transceiver
The 1.8, 2.0 and 2.2 GHz transceivers are similar mechanically to the
1.5 GHz transceivers. They will fit SR500-s stations (except the micro II).
The block diagrams are similar to the 1.5 GHz transceivers. However, the
transmit and receive frequencies are set at the factory in the firmware
(EEPROM U6 for the 021-513890 transmit baseband processor, instead of
being set by decade switches on the synthesizer).
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM 5-28-3
Also, most of these inbound receivers have an RSSI test point ( labelled
AGC on some transceivers) that produces a voltage between 0 and 4.5 volts
proportionnal to the received RF level (approx. 5dBm). The following
curve shows a typical RSSI voltage:
RSSI (AGC) Voltage
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
-92 -90 -88 -86 -84 -82 -80 -78 -76 -74 -72 -70 -68 -66 -64 -62 -60 -58 -56 -54 -52 -50 -48 -46
Received RF Level (dBm)
V
d
c
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-28-4 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM
3. 5 GHz
Transceiver
The 3.5 GHz transceivers are similar mechanically to the 1.3-2.7 GHz
transceivers. They will fit SR500-s stations (except the micro II).
Only two output power options are available:
- low power at +20 dBm (0.1 Watt)
- high power at +30 dBm (2 Watts)
A major difference is that the transmit and receive frequencies are set in the
firmware (EEPROM U6 for the 021-513890 transmit baseband processor,
instead of being set by decade switches on the synthesizer).
For more information about their specifications, refer to the SRT brochure.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM 5-28-5
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-28-6 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM
10. 5 GHz
Transceiver
For more information on the 10.5 GHz transceivers, either outbound or
inbound, refer to the 10.5 GHz System Descriptive Information manual
033-100035-001.
For more information on the installation of the 10.5 GHz transceivers, the
Antenna Integrated Module (AIM) or OEM provided antenna, refer also to
the AIM Installation Guide 033-100056-001 and Pole Mount Kits for 10.5
GHz Panel Antennas 033-100116-006.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM 5-28-7
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-28-8 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM
T1, E1 or E2
NEM
For more information on the T1, E1 or E2 NEM, refer to the SR500-s
Network Extender Modules Field Service Manual 033-100020-001.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM 5-28-9
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-28-10 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERAD.SAM
Cent ral St at i on
Cont rol l er

C
S
C
O
M
M
O
N

C
H
A
N
N
E
L

S
IG
N
A
L
IN
G
C
S

C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
T
E
S
T
E
R
C
S

M
U
L
D
E
X
C
S

T
I
M
I
N
G
C
S

F
R
A
M
I
N
G
C
S

C
P
U
C
S

I
N
T
R
A
C
A
L
L
C
S

C
O
M
M
O
N

C
H
A
N
N
E
L

S
IG
N
A
L
IN
G
C
S

C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
T
E
S
T
E
R
C
S

M
U
L
D
E
X
C
S

T
I
M
I
N
G
C
S

F
R
A
M
I
N
G
C
S

C
P
U
C
S

I
N
T
R
A
C
A
L
L
COMPUTER 1 COMPUTER 2**
* (Optional modules)
** (Associated only with standby protected version)
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
DISPLAY PANEL
* * * *
PWR
CMPTR 1
CTRL
CPU
CS LINE
BLKD
CMPTR 2
OS MAJ
OS PWR
OS LINE
ACO
SR500 SYSTEM CONTROLLER
ACK ACO MODE
TRUNKS TIME LOST I - CALL
MEMORY CARD
Front View of a System Control Shelf
S04\FVSYSCS.DS4
* *
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-29
CS LINE
CARD
CS LINE
CARD
SR500 Non-Redundant Central Station (CS) Block Diagram
OUTBOUND
RECEIVER A
CS FRAMING
CARD A
CS MULDEX
CARD A
RX DATA
SYSTEM CONTROL SHELF
MODULAR POWER SUPPLY
CS CONTINUOUS
QUALITY
TESTER CARD A*
( * : OPTIONAL )
RX CLOCK
CS INTRACALL
CARD A*
CS TIMING
CARD A
HEX
CODE
SWITCHES
FLAT
WIRE
BUSSES
CS DATA/LINE
CARD
CS
LINE
SHELF
INTERFACE
CARDS
2/SHELF
CS COMMON
CHANNEL
CARD A*
4.864 Mbps
LINE SHELF(S)
TRANSMITTER A
ALARMS,CD,CDC
KEYBOARD
C.R.T.*
(REMOTE)
MODEM*
RS 232 RS 232
2/4 - Wire
PRINTER*
DOT
MATRIX
PRINTER
MSU CARD
REMOTE
TERMINAL
LOCAL
TERMINAL
MSU (4 - 40 M)
DISPLAY PANEL
CS ARBITRATOR
CARD
shut-
down
r eset
swi tch
ARBITRATOR:
A or B Select
TRANSMITER A ENABLE
P.A.
RADIO
TRANSMITTER
FRAME
FORMATTER
TRANSMIT
MESSAGE
MEMORY
MB0/MB1
TRANSMIT
PCM MEMORY
32 PCM/TRUNK
FRAME
DE-FORMATTER
RECEIVE
PCM MEMORY
64 PCM
RING
SCANNER
RECEIVE
MESSAGE
MEMORY
MB0/MB1
CS CPU
CARD A
(80186)
CIRCUL-
ATOR
RX FILTER
TX CLOCK
TX DATA
RS 232
MASS
STORAGE
UNIT
RS 232
KEYBOARD
C.R.T *.
(LOCAL)
S04\CSNRDNDN.DS4
MODEM*
DISPLAY DRIVER
HOWLER TONE/
ORDER WIRE*
MCLK
TX FILTER
TCL A ENABLE
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
3
0
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
C
.
S
A
M
CS LINE
CARD
CS LINE
CARD
SR500 Redundant Central Station (CS) Block Diagram
OUTBOUND
RECEIVER A
CS FRAMING
CARD A
CS MULDEX
CARD A
RX DATA
CS FRAMING
CARD B
CS MULDEX
CARD B
OPTIONAL REDUNDANCY
SYSTEM CONTROL SHELF
MODULAR POWER SUPPLY
CS CONTINUOUS
QUALITY
TESTER CARD A*
( * : OPTIONAL )
RX CLOCK
CS INTRACALL
CARD A*
CS TIMING
CARD A
CS CONTINUOUS
QUALITY
TESTER CARD B*
CS INTRACALL
CARD B*
CS TIMING
CARD B
CS CPU
CARD B
(80186)
HEX
CODE
SWITCHES
CS DATA/LINE
CARD
CS
LINE
SHELF
INTERFACE
CARDS
2/SHELF
CS COMMON
CHANNEL
CARD B*
CS COMMON
CHANNEL
CARD A*
4.864 Mbps
LINE SHELF(S)
TRANSMITTER A
ALARMS,CD,CDC
KEYBOARD
C.R.T.*
(REMOTE)
MODEM*
RS 232 RS 232
2/4 - Wire
PRINTER*
DOT
MATRIX
PRINTER
MSU CARD
REMOTE
TERMINAL
LOCAL
TERMINAL
MSU (4 - 40 M)
DISPLAY PANEL
shut-
do wn
reset
swi tch
TRANSMITER B ENABLE
TRANSMITER A ENABLE
P.A.
RADIO
TRANSMITTER
FRAME
FORMATTER
TRANSMIT
MESSAGE
MEMORY
MB0/MB1
FRAME
DE-FORMATTER
RING
SCANNER
RECEIVE
MESSAGE
MEMORY
MB0/MB1
CS CPU
CARD A
(80186)
SPLITTER/
COMBINER
OR RF
SWITCH*
CIRCUL-
ATOR
TX FILTER
RX FILTER
TX CLOCK
TX DATA
RS 232
P.A.
MASS
STORAGE
UNIT
RS 232
KEYBOARD
C.R.T *.
(LOCAL)
S04\CSRDNDN.DS4
MODEM*
DISPLAY DRIVER
ORDER WIRE*/
HOWLER TONE
P.A.
DUPLEXER
TRANSMIT
PCM MEMORY
32 PCM/TRUNK
RECEIVE
PCM MEMORY
64 PCM/TRUNK
CS ARBITRATOR
CARD
ARBITRATOR:
A or B Select
MCLK
FLAT
WIRE
BUSSES
TCL B ENABLE
TCL A ENABLE
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
OUTBOUND
RECEIVER B *
TRANSMITTER B *
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
C
.
S
A
M
5
-
3
1
Cent ral St at ion Cont roller - Funct ional Descript ion
Basic Functions
The SR 500 central station contains the computer (also known
as the controller or Traffic Control Logic - TCL) which handles
the direction and control of all system activities. The computer
in its minimal configuration consists of six printed circuit
boards (cards). These are the following:
The C/S CPU: contains the primary microprocessor and
memory for the system. The CS CPU directs the activities of the
OS's via the two management trunks in the inbound and
outbound frame - MB0 and MB1.
The C/S Timing card: produces various submultiples of the
main system clock and the sequenced control signals which
enable and activate most periodic (i.e., frame related) system
activities. The Timing card also contains the connection
memory, which controls the time connections between the lines
and the time slots (trunks).
The C/S Muldex card: acts as the interface
multiplexer/demultiplexer of VF signals between the line
cards (customer connections) and the Framing card (i.e., central
station computer ). In the outbound direction, the Muldex card
receives PCM samples and signalling information from the line
cards, reorganises this information into a block-oriented format
compatible with the SR 500 frame structure, and sends it to the
Framing card. In the inbound direction, the Muldex card
buffers the block-organized data coming from the Frame card
and outputs the data as a standard PCM bit stream (i.e.,
8 bits/sample, and 125 micro-seconds between samples)
towards the line cards. The Muldex card also implements the
ring scanner function.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-32 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
The C/S Framing card: serves as the link between the radio
transceiver and the C/S CPU and the Muldex card. In the
outbound direction, the Framing card adds the outbound MB0
and MB1 data to the traffic coming from the line cards (via the
Muldex card), scrambles the completed data stream and sends
both the data stream and the transmit clock to the transmitter.
In the receive direction, the Framing card receives the
recovered clock and data signals from the radio, descrambles
the data, and detects the Unique Words (UW's) in the inbound
frame data. Once the UW's are detected, the card stores the
MB0 and MB1 messages for access by the CS CPU card; trunk
1-60 PCM and signalling information is sent to the Muldex card
for demultiplexing and transfer to the line cards. The radio
alarms are made available to the CPU through an I/O port on
the Framing card.
The Display/Arbitrator card: serves several functions in the
operation of the C/S, including:
Buffering the address, data and control signals of the CPU for
the line cards (through the line shelf interface cards).
Providing inter-CPU communication between the main and
standby CPU's (via a RAM buffer) to keep the standby CPU
informed of the current status of the system.
To provide serial communication facilities for an optional
modem, for remote access (log-ins) to the system.
To drive the LED's of the front panel display card.
To drive an external Alarm Cut-Off card.
To provide the main system clock (MCLK, 4.864 MHz) which
can be either locally generated or slaved to an external
reference.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-33
The Mass Storage Unit (MSU) : Currently used as a print
spooler for information being sent to the external dot matrix
printer. The unit includes its own CPU and provides 4 to 40
megabytes of non-volatile, removable storage via solid state
"flash" memory cards. It also provides an interface for the
external peripherals (local and remote terminals, and dot
matrix printer). More information will be forthcoming as the
MSU documentation becomes available.
Optional Units
The Controller can also be optionally equipped with three other
cards which expand the capabilities of the SR500 system. These
cards are not required for basic operation. This second group of
optional cards comprises the following:
Intracall card: Provides the ability to connect two subscribers
located at the same outstation directly without the use of a
trunk. The card decodes dialled rotary or touch tone digits in
the incoming data, compares the dialled digits to a directory of
in-system phone numbers and decides whether the call is
within the same outstation or not. If so, the call is made via a
direct connection at the outstation, and the trunks used to
establish the call are dropped. To undertake its activities, the
Intracall card is equipped with its own CPU and RAM. Note
that a trunk is still required during call set up. The benefit of
intracall is an increase in the traffic capacity of the system.
This option also enables standalone operation when
communications between an OS and the CS are broken, and the
Accidental Off-Hook Protection feature.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-34 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
Common Channel Signalling Card: Allows call set-up to
occur without the use of voice frequency trunks. The Common
Channel Signalling card is an extension of the Intracall card and
is under the control of the Intracall CPU. Hence, to equip a
system with Common Channel Signalling, it must also be
equipped with Intracall. Common Channel Signalling mode
incorporates the following features:
Regeneration of remote subscriber's DTMF or Dial Pulse
selection signals at the Central Station.
Storage and playback of Operator Verification Messages.
Detection of operator's response to verification message.
The Common Channel Signalling option allows local calls
(intracalls) to be completed even during an All Trunks Busy
(ATB) condition.
Continuous Quality Tester Card: Allows the C/S to test the
quality of a radio link to any O/S by invoking a BER test
between the C/S and the O/S in question. This feature is
accessible via the C/S interactive menus. The functionality of
this feature was enhanced at software revision level 4.9 so that
it is possible to test a radio link on a hop-by-hop basis while
distinguishing between errors occurring in the outbound and
inbound directions.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-35
Ext ending Alarm Indicat ion
The central station has several dry-contact, relay outputs that allow you to
extend the following alarms from the central station to a remote
alarm-monitoring centre:
1. All -Trunk-Busy (ATB) Alarm - All 60 trunks are occupied.
2. Central Station Major Alarm - No communication exists between the
central station's standby equipment or mass storage unit is in alarm.
3. Central Station Line Alarm - At the central station, a VF or data module
has been removed or failed.
4. Remote Station Major Alarm - A remote station is not responding to
polling from the central station, or the remote station's standby
equipment is in alarm.
5. Remote Station Line Alarm - At a remote station, a VF or data module
has been removed or failed.
6. Remote Station Power/External Alarm - remote station has lost its
primary power source (e.g., AC) or is reporting an external alarm.
7. C/S Power System Alarm - A C/S module of the modular power system
has failed.
The relays each provide three contacts--C (common), NO (normally open)
and NC (normally closed)--to terminate the wires coming from the remote
alarm-monitoring centre. Contacts NO and NC can withstand a maximum
current of 1A.
The MPS failure alarm relay contacts are located on the back of the MPS
shelf whereas the remaining alarm relay outputs are located on the ACO
card on the back of the system control shelf. However, if your central
station is equipped with either Krone or wirewrap terminal panels, the
alarm connections are made to these panels.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-36 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
Central Station Without Terminal Panels:
Note: the connections (the wirewrap terminals are C, NO, NC for each relay)
are on the alarm cut-off module on the back of the controller shelf for all the
relays except the MPS failure alarm, as shown:
Note :Option 001is for 4 relays, opt 002 for 8 relays, opt 003 for 6 relays.
The connections for the MPS alarm relay are on the back of the Modular Power
System shelf.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-37
Central Station Equipped With Krone Terminal Panels
For Central Station Equipped With Krone Terminal Panels, the connections are
done on the first Krone terminal panel as per the following table:
Rack-Mounted Terminal Panel 1
Terminal Pin Designation
TB9 5
7
6
COMMON
NC
NO
Power System Alarm
TB18 5
6
7
COMMON
NC
NO
Remote Station
Line Alarm
TB27 5
6
7
COMMON
NC
NO
Remote Station Major
Alarm
TB36 5
6
7
COMMON
NC
NO
Central Station Major
Alarm
TB37 3
2
1
COMMON
NC
NO
All Trunk Busy Alarm
TB40 1
2
3
COMMON
NC
NO
Central Station Line
Alarm
TB40 5
6
7
COMMON
NC
NO
Remote Station
Power/External Alarm
Central Station Equipped With Wirewrap Terminal Panels
For Central Station Equipped With Wirewrap Terminal Panels, refer to the Central
station field Service Manual for more information on the connections.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-38 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
Orderwi re
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-39
Int roduct ion
With orderwire, maintenance personnel can communicate between remote
stations, the central station or be connected to an external telephone line
(central office line, PBX line, etc). Broadcast mode can be used to ring all
telephone sets connected to the orderwire lines.
C/O
(Exchange)
C/S
SR500
Telephone set
Telephone set Telephone set
RS
RS
Orderwire Configuration
or
Speaker phone
Telephone
line
SR500-s Course Notes
5-40 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
Syst em Requirement s
Central station:
To support orderwire, the central station must be equipped with the
following hardware:
1. Orderwire Main Board 513440
2. Central Station Controller Shelf Backplane 512162 or latest part
number
3. Central Station CPU Board 512156 equipped for orderwire
A speakerphone allowing hands-free communication is available as an
option for use with the central station's orderwire. If used, the central
station must be equipped with the following hardware:
4. Orderwire Front Panel 513435
5. Central Station Transceiver Shelf Backplane 513450 or latest part
number
Remote stations
To support orderwire, the remote stations must be equipped with SLIM
Controller 513260 (or latest part number) or RMO/RMR Controller 511836
(or latest part number).
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-41
The t wo f undament al t hings about Orderwire
1 - You can access orderwire from the:
Central Station
Remote stations
Exchange line (connected to the exchange jack in the back
of the CS.)
2 - You can establish communication in two different ways:
Direct connection
Broadcast mode
In order t o est ablish communicat ion using orderwire:
From an SR500 station
- Dial remote station address number to reach an remote station, it must
consist of three digits (i.e. 001, 002, 003, ... 010, etc.).
- Dial 8 to reach the CS.
- Dial *0, to do a broadcast: (all remote stations having a telephone set
connected to the order wire line, in monitor mode, will receive three
consecutive short rings followed by a voice message).
- Dial 9 to reach the telephone network (external telephone line connected
to the back of the central station) in the "exchange" jack.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-42 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
From the Telephone Network
Note: to call from the Telephone Network, an external telephone line must be
connected to the "exchange" RJ -12 jack of the central station SR500-s
backplane.
- Dial first the telephone number of the external line (in Canada 7 digits),
and wait for the orderwire dial tone. When the dial tone is detected, you
are connected to the orderwire system and you can reach either the
central station (dial 8) or any remote station (directly or broadcast).
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-43
Locat ion and Int erf ace
The orderwire main board 513440 is located on the system controller shelf
just below the arbitrator.

To access the central station orderwire line, you must plug a telephone into
the RJ-12 orderwire jack located on the back of the controller shelf or use
the optional front panel 513435.
To access the exchange line, you must plug an exchange line (a telephone
line coming or a PBX line) into the RJ-12 exchange jack located on the back
of the controller shelf.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-44 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
Orderwire Front Panel 513435 (opt ional)
As an option, the Orderwire Front Panel 513435 can be added. This
optional board allows hands free communication using the central station's
orderwire line. It includes a special key pad and a speakerphone. The front
panel is located in the transceiver shelf.
As previously noted, this board is optional. if you don't have the front
panel you can plug an external telephone set into the orderwire RJ-12 jack
located at the rear of the C.S. on the controller shelf backplane.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-45
SR500-s Course Notes
5-46 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
Opt ions
The orderwire module 513440 has only fixed options. This module can be
equipped with two independent functions as assembly options:
The order wire function and the howler tone detection function:
Orderwire
The CS order wire module must have the same companding law option
(A law or law) than the controller modules in the remote stations.
Howler Tone Detection (Not part of the order wire function)
This option scans the active exchange line for a howler tone. Upon
detection of the howler tone on one of the lines, the central station applies
an attenuator to this line and sends a message to the remote station to
generate howler tone to the corresponding subscriber line.
The purpose of this option is to avoid codec saturation caused by the high
amplitude tone coming from the exchange, and to prevent the use of a
trunk to transmit a howler tone.
For more information about the options, refer to the assembly option manual.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM 5-47
This page has been left blank intentionally
SR500-s Course Notes
5-48 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05C.SAM
Cent ral St at i on
Line Shelves
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM 5-49

C
S

L
IN
E
S
H
E
L
F

IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
C
S

L
IN
E
S
H
E
L
F

IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
1
2 3 4
0 1
Front View of a CS Line Shelf Equipment with Various
Types of CS Line Modules S04\FVCSVTM.DS4
3 Positions Reserved for CS Line Modules
(various versions shown)
4 Positions Reserved for CS Line Modules
(2-wire versions shown)
1 Line Shelf Address Selector Switches

2 Positions Reserved for CS Line Module or
CS Data Module (2-wire CS Line Module
shown)
1
LINE/DATA
SHELF #
LINE/DATA SHELF SECTION
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
CS LINE SHELF INTERFACE MODULE
ADDRESS SELECTOR SWITCH SETTINGS
1 0 (lines 1-64) 1 (lines 65-128)
2 2 (lines 129-192) 3 (lines 193-256)
3 4 (lines 257-320) 5 (lines 321-384)
4 6 (lines 385-448) 7 (lines 449-512)
5 8 (lines 513-576) 9 (lines 577-640)
6 A (lines 641-704) B (lines 705-768)
7 C (lines 769-832) D (lines 833-896)
8 E (lines 897-960) F (lines 961-1024)
SR500-s Course Notes
5-50 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM
2-Wire & MSM Centurion Payphone 4-Wire E&M
CS VF Modules and Test Jacks (Data Modules Not Shown) CSVFLM2.DS4
M
E
(Line)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 1)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 2)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 3)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 4)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 5)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 6)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 7)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 8)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 1)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 2)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 3)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Line 4)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Transmit)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Receive)
Line 1
M
E
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Transmit)
Line
Eqpt
Tip & Ring (Receive)
Line 2
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
D
.
S
A
M
5
-
5
1
S04\CSLSHEL.DS4
Rear View
CS VF Line Shelf
Front View
Six 50-Pin
Amphenol Connectors
C
S
L
IN
E
S
H
E
L
F
IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
C
S
L
IN
E
S
H
E
L
F
IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
1
13 25
14
J10 J8
J15
J9 J13 J12 J11
1
13 25
14
J14
1
13
25
14
1
13
25
14
1
13 25
14
1
13 25
14
J10 J8
J14
J15
Data
Channel A
Data
Channel B
J9 J11 J13 J12
J14
J15
For customer connections, see the Central Station Field Service Manual
SR500-s Course Notes
5-52 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM
S04\CSLDSHE.DS4
Rear View Front View
CS Data Shelf
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8
J24 J23 J22 J21 J20 J19 J18 J17
1
13 25
14
1
13 25
14
J10 J8
J14
J15
J9
C
S
L
IN
E
S
H
E
L
F
IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
C
S
L
IN
E
S
H
E
L
F
IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
C
S
D
A
T
A
M
O
D
U
L
E
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8
J24J23J22J21J20J19J18J17
18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
13
25
14
1
13
25
14
Associated
Shelf Position
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8
J24J23J22J21J20J19J18J17
8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Data
Channel A
Data
Channel B
Three 50-Pin
Amphenol
Connectors CS Line & Data Shelf
For customer connections, see the Central Station Field Service Manual
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM 5-53
TB38
G
N
D +
_
BATT
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
TB1 TB7 TB3 TB9 TB5
TB10 TB16 TB12 TB14 TB18
TB19 TB25 TB21 TB23 TB27
TB28 TB34 TB30 TB32 TB36
TB2 TB4
TB11
TB37
1
TB8 TB6
TB17 TB15
TB26
TB35 TB33
TB24 TB22
TB31
TB13
TB20
TB29
SR500 Central Station Krone Terminal Panel (Optional)
48 VDC
Battery
Connections
S04\OPTPPAC.DS4
A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
SR TELECOM
BATT GND
+ -
F
1 10
TB1
A
Wire Wrap Terminal Blocks
for VF Connections
SR500 Central Station Wire-wrap Terminal Panel (Optional)
-48 VDC Input
Barrier Strip
for -48 VDC Input
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5
-48 VDC Return
For customer connections, see the Central Station Field Service Manual
SR500-s Course Notes
5-54 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM
UDI Shelves:
Overview:
A UDI shelf is used to connect the SR500s Central Station directly to a
digital exchange using Primary Rate Access (PRA) E1 links at 2.048 Mbps
(or T1 links at 1.544 Mbps). There are two PRA (E1 or T1 links) per UDI
module.
The UDI shelf requires three basic hardware components:
1) UDI controller modules installed in the shelf's center positions (like LSI)
2) UDI modules installed in other positions like line modules
3) Interconnect cards installed on the back of the shelf to provide the
physical connections.
The UDI shelf must be the first shelf near the controller shelf. It is wired to
the controller shelf using the same flat cables as for an analogue shelf plus
two additional flat cables. The small additional bus is terminated at the
bottom of the backplane by a PCB SD513010.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM 5-54-1
Two types of physical interface, located on the back of the UDI shelf, are
currently available.
Connections to the digital exchanges (E1 links) can be done from the back
with 75 Ohms coaxial cables and unbalanced BNC connectors:
or with 64 pins DIN connectors for the balanced 120 Ohms signals:
Refer to the SR500s Central Station FSM for the interconnection details.
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
A UDI shelf needs a UDI controller module in position 9 for the left hand
side of the shelf and another one in position 10 if the right hand side of the
shelf is used. UDI Controller modules have an address that is set using the
dip switch SW1 according to the following table:
SW1 Settings
UDI Shelf UDI Controller Address SW1-Pos2 SW1-Pos3
1 Left Hand Side 0 Open (off or 0) Open (off or 0)
1 Right Hand Side 1 Closed (on or 1) Open (off or 0)
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM 5-54-3
Each UDI module provides an interface for two PRA-E1 connections which
support a total of 60 subscriber lines (for non concentrated CAS). The
SR500 line addresses are set by two decade switches located on the front of
the UDI module according to the following table:
Digital group number and their associated line adresses in E1 mode
Upper Switch Setting Lower Switch Setting Digital Group numbers Associated line adresses
0 0 1-2 1-60
0 1 3-4 65-124
0 2 5-6 129-188
0 3 7-8 193-252
0 4 9-10 257-316
0 5 11-12 321-380
0 6 13-14 385-444
0 7 15-16 449-508
0 8 17-18 513-572
0 9 19-20 577-636
1 0 21-22 641-700
1 1 23-24 705-764
1 2 25-26 769-828
1 3 27-28 833-892
1 4 29-30 897-956
1 5 31-32 961-1020
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-4 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
Voice UDI
The signalling protocol is often different from one switch to another e.g. which bit
in the signalling time-slot 16 ( or 17) is turned on or off to indicate off-hook or on
hook, ringing or not ringing, 12 or 16 kHz fee pulses are present or not, etc.
SRT have written software to interface with some switches like the
AXE-10+ESM/RSM, DX200+V2 sign. or the NEAX-61L+B-DTLM. We can change
the protocol by changing the EPROMs on the module. Even for the same switch
type, there are local variations from one country to another: so, in addition,
parameters have to be set in the interactive menus to account for these
variations.
There are plans to write generic protocol software such as V5.2 PSTN
(concentrated) in the future.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM 5-54-5
Data UDI
Data UDI uses the same hardware as the voice UDI but a different software
protocol option (e.g. Data UDI) is selected in the network interface UDI menus.
The concept is to transfer 64 Kbps (full duplex) data between a remote station
and the central station. However the user interface at the central station is not a
single circuit as for G.703 - 64 Kbps service but the user data is multiplexed on
one time slot of an E1 2.048 Mbps stream.
The RS G.703 module can have an external V.35 or X.21 adapter. There is plan to
integrate the adapter on the RS G.703 Data card (internal adapter). This module
will be called the RS DSU module.
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-6 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m


t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
I
N
T
E
R
A
C
K
.
S
A
M
5
-
5
4
-
7
Power-up:
Since the addresses of a UDI module depends on the BCD front switches, a
UDI module can be inserted in any position of the UDI shelf, as long as a
UDI Controller is installed with the proper address for that half shelf.
After the start-up sequence shown below, the normal state of the UDI
module LEDs is the following: the top LED (sync LED) is green and it is
interrupted every two seconds approximately when synchronisation with
the received frame is achieved; the bottom LED (red, no signal) is normally
off and flashes slowly in the absence of received signal.
Important Note: the stat 1and stat 2 LED are inverted so their colors are
incorrectly shown in the FSM.
After insertion of the UDI module, lines defined by the address given by
the decade switches shall be shown on a SLE command in the interactive
menus, and can be assigned to remote stations using the usual
Management menu (GAEU).
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-8 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
Troubleshooting:
Since UDI is a digital service, the central station master clock will be
normally be slaved to an external reference or to the incoming E1 from the
switch so that the transmit and receive E1 frequencies are the same (refer to
the next section for more information). If the TX and RX signal have a
different frequency, frame alignment errors and high BER can be
experienced.
The BNC connectors on the controller are used to monitor a UDI group
without interfering with the signal. The group number must be defined in
the Network Interface-UDI-Diagnostics section of the interactive menus.
These connectors may be used to verify that the TX and RX data of any
group are at the same frequency as explained in the next section (external
clock reference).
N.B. The DB-25 and the RJ-12 jacks are used for factory testing at this time.
If multiframe format with CRC-4 error detection code (ref. G.706) is being
received from the switch, then the number of CRC errors may be
monitored by activating the hardware option on the UDI module. In
addition, the option must be activated in the interactive menus under
Network Interfaces -UDI- Diagnostics.
If the green LED is not flashing every 2 seconds approximately, it may be
due to the microprocessor being frozen. In this case, a reset button is
provided on each UDI module.
SR-500 services are verified in a similar way as the analogue interface. For
example, 2-wire service can be verified by originating a call and receiving a
call on each subscriber line. Analogue VF level tests can then be done from
one subscriber to another. A more automatic and stringent validation
involves the use of a call generator to test the call completion ratio.
Refer to the UDI section of Central Station Field Service Manual for more
information on these tests.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM 5-54-9
Some diagnostic results can be reported by the LEDs on each UDI module.
Refer to the CS Field Service Manual to interpret the UDI LED indicators
and the associated required action.
Important Notes:
the stat 1and stat 2 LED are inverted so their colors
are incorrectly shown in the FSM.
The DB-25, RJ -12 and potentiometer is currently for
factory use only.
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-10 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
External Reference Clock

Overview:
Some digital customer equipment use their own clock to transmit their data
(e.g. UDI, ISDN, G703, synchronous data cards with EXT. TX clock, etc.). It
is important that the clock received from the customer equipment and the
clock transmitted by the SR500 operate at the same frequency.
To insure this, the SR500 internal clock can be slaved, using a PLL, to an
external reference. The physical input for the external clock signal is
located on the back of the controller shelf, as shown in the following
diagram:
When we use an external reference, parameters in the System
Configuration menu must be set to a SLAVE clock and an EXTERNAL
INPUT source. Also the frequency (i.e 2.048 MHz, 1.544 MHz or 64kHz)
and level ( TTL, RS422, etc.) parameters must be set in this menu to match
the input signal provided.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM 5-54-11
It can also be retrieved from one of the interface modules (e.g. UDI, ISDN).
When UDI are used, the SR500 clock can be slaved to one of the RX E1 links
coming from the digital switch. The choice can be fixed or automatic. When
set for fixed, we have to define the digital group that will be used as the
reference. When it is defined as automatic, it will change automatically
from one E1 to another if the signal disappears from the first one. In this
case, some digital groups can be masked in order not to be selected as a
reference. This is done in the Network Interface section of the interactive
menus. In the System configuration section, the clock must be set to
SLAVE, coming from the DIGITAL INTERFACE and the format should be
E1 (or T1). For more information, see the external reference clock section in
the SR500s Central Station Field Service Manual.
When ISDN modules are used, and no other method of slaving the CS is
available, a clock signal can be extracted from the first line of an ISDN
module. In order to do this, a modification must be done on the backplane
by SR Telecom (ECN #5479). In this case, an ISDN line coming from the
switch must be physically connected to the first line, but this ISDN line
cannot be used by an user at a remote station. It is only used for the
purpose of synchronisation. Other ISDN lines on the same module (e.g.
line 2, 3 and 4) are fully operational and can be defined at remote stations
and used by end users. The interactive menus (Configuration section)
must be set for SLAVE, EXTERNAL INPUT, TTL/CMOS level, 2.048 Mbps.
Validation:

Proper synchronisation can be verified by looking at the TX clock (or data)
and the RX clock (or data) of a digital module on the same oscilloscope.
Both signals, the one coming from the external equipment and the one
generated by the SR500, must be stable on the oscilloscope. If they don't
have the same frequency, one signal will be moving with respect to the
other.
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-12 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
I nterrack Buffer
modules
Int roduct ion
A set of two interrack buffer modules are used to install additional line
shelves in a second central station rack. The first central station rack is
called the main rack and the second one is called the auxiliary rack.
The function of the interrack buffer, as the name implies, is to provide
buffering for the line shelves backplane signals. It also includes a line
address decoder, controlled by the jumpers JP1 and JP2 and dip switches
SW1 and SW2, as seen later.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM 5-54-13
One interrack buffer is installed in the main rack just above the controller
shelf and the second one is installed above the line shelves in the auxiliary
rack. Both modules are connected together using 4 cables, each one
composed of 50 wires plus a shield. Both interrack modules are identical
except for their respective options.
C
2 3
5 4
8 9 7
5 4
1
6
0
M
INTERFV.DS4
Front View of a Protected Central Station Equipped With Eight Line/Data Shelves
Interrack
Buffer
Interrack
Buffer
4 Cables
(approximately 1meter)
+5 Volts
remote sense
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-14 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
Important notes: Important notes: Important notes: Important notes:
Both racks shall be grounded to a common point.
The main interrack buffer is located above the controller shelf. It is connected to
the top of the controller shelf through 4 flat cables in the same way that the
controller shelf is connected to the line shelf at the top of the line shelf. Similarly,
the auxiliary interrack buffer is located above the line shelves. It is connected to
the uppermost line shelf through 4 flat cables. Line shelves are interconnected in
the same way as in the main rack.
It is recommended that a terminating board (e.g. SD510866) be installed on the
last line shelf of each rack.
The interrack buffers must be connected together using cables from J 5 of the
main interrack buffer to J 5 of the auxiliary interrack buffer, J 6 and J 6, J 7 and J 7
and J 8 to J 8. The shield be must tied to the ground using the screws and bolts
near the connectors.
The interrack buffer requires +5 Volts from the modular power supply. So wires
must be connected from the CS power supply backplane connectors J 19 and J 20
to to the connector J 11on each of the interrack buffers.
The +5 Volts remote sense cable shall be connected from the modular power
systemto the last line shelf of the auxiliary rack.
Line shelf address 0 must always be in the main (first) rack. To avoid noise pickup,
the main interrack buffer shall be pulled out if there is no line modules in the
second rack (ref. 033-100070-001)
Both interrack modules are identical except for their respective options.
J P1and J P2 are set to MAIN for the interrack buffer located in the main rack and
set to AUX for the one installed in the auxiliary rack. The dip switches SW1and
SW2 are the same for both modules and are dependant on the addresses of line
shelves located in the main rack and the addresses of line shelves located in the
auxiliary rack. SW1and SW2 setting is irrelevant for un-installed line shelf
addresses. For more details, see the following option table.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM 5-54-15
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS FOR INTERRACK
BUFFER MODULE LOCATED ON AUXILIARY
CS RACK
TABLE C
512965T.DS4
CS Interrack Buffer Module (e.g. 512965) - Option Tables
VARIABLE SETTINGS
512965 - Y Y Y
SEE TABLE A
SEE TABLE B
SEE TABLE C
OFF
-
ON OFF
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7 SW1-8
6 SW1-7
5 SW1-6
4 SW1-5
3 SW1-4
2 SW1-3
1 SW1-2
0
SW1-1
SW2-8
SW2-7
SW2-6
SW2-1
SW2-5
SW2-4
SW2-3
SW2-2
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS FOR INTERRACK
BUFFER MODULE LOCATED ON MAIN
CS RACK
SW2-7 E ON OFF
F SW2-8 OFF ON
D
C
B
A
7
8
9
6
5
SW2-6
SW2-5
SW2-4
SW2-3
SW2-1
SW2-2
SW1-8
SW1-7
SW1-6
TABLE B
0
2
4
3
1
SW1-1
SW1-5
SW1-4
SW1-3
SW1-2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
A MAIN CS RACK
AUXILIARY CS RACK B
MAIN MAIN
AUX AUX
TABLE A LOCATION OF CS
INTERRACK BUFFER MODULE
NOTES
FOR UNASSIGNED LINE SHELF ADDRESSES, THE SWITCH
SETTINGS BECOME INSIGNIFICANT.
LINE SHELF ADDRESS 0 SHOULD ALWAYS BE ASSIGNED
TOA SHELF ON THE MAIN CS RACK.
6
7
6
7
DEFAULT
A B
-
7
6
DEFAULT
A
-
B
LINE SHELF
ADDRESS SWITCHES
DIP
MAIN CS RACK AUXILIARY CS RACK
LOCATION OF LINE SHELF ADDRESS LOCATION OF LINE SHELF ADDRESS
MAIN CS RACK
ADDRESS
LINE SHELF
DIP
SWITCHES
AUXILIARY CS RACK
# LOCATION JP1 JP2 DEFAULT
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
5
4
-
1
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
I
N
T
E
R
A
C
K
.
S
A
M
Interrack Module (e.g. 512965) - Component Layout
J P1
J P2
SW2
SW1
512965LO.DS4
U18
U24
C
2
0
C
2
8
RN6
RN10
C
3
3
U31
R92
U36
C
3
8
C
4
3
U12
C
1
3
R59
R60
R133
U17
C
1
9
U23
C
2
7
C
3
2
SW1
RN5
RN9
U30
U35
C
3
7
C
4
2
U41
U43
C
5
1
C
4
8
U44
C
5
2
C56
U47
R106
R107
R108
C
5
5
C50
R
1
1
9
R
1
1
8
R
1
1
7
R
1
1
6
R
1
1
5
R
1
1
4
R
1
1
3
C
5
8
C
6
1
R
1
3
2
R
1
3
1
U49
U51
R105
RN14
U46
U48
U45
U50
C
5
4
C
5
7
R
1
3
0
R
1
2
9
R
1
2
8
R
1
1
2
R
1
1
1
R
1
1
0
R
1
0
9
R
1
2
3
R
1
2
2
R
1
2
1
R
1
2
0
C
5
9 R
1
2
4
R
1
2
5
R
1
2
6
R
1
2
7
C
6
0
C
5
3
R
1
0
4
R
1
0
3
R
1
0
2
R
1
0
1
R
1
0
0
R
9
9
R
9
8
R
9
7
R
9
6
R
9
5
R
9
4
R
9
3
C
3
9
C
4
4
U32
U37
U27
U25
R74
C
3
0
C
3
4
R
9
1
R
9
0
R
8
9
R
8
8
R
8
7
R
8
6
R
8
5
C29
R
7
3
R
7
2
R
7
1
R
7
0
R
6
9
R
6
8
C
2
1
R
6
7
R
6
6
R
6
5
R
6
4
R
6
3
R
6
2
R
6
1
C
1
4
C
1
6
C
2
4
C
3
1
U13
RN3
U8
RN2
RN1
C
9
C
1
0
R
4
2
C
5
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
R
5
R24
U4
R25
R
6
R
7
R
8
R
9
R
1
0
R
1
1
R
1
2
R
1
3
C
6
R
2
6
R
2
7
R
2
8
R
2
9
R
3
0
R
3
1
U5
R
1
4
R
1
5
R
1
6
R
1
7
R
1
8
R
1
9
R
2
0
R
2
1
R
2
2
C
7
R
3
2
R
3
3
R
3
4
R
3
5
R
3
6
R
3
7
R
3
8
R
3
9
R
4
0
U6
R
2
3
U9 U10
U14 U15
U21 U20
C22
R
4
4
R
4
5
R
4
6
R
4
7
R
4
8
R
4
9
R
5
0
R
5
1
R
5
2
R
5
3
R
5
4
R
5
5
R
5
6
R
5
7
C
1
1
C
1
7
C
2
5
U26
R75
RN7
U28
RN8
U33
RN12
RN11
RN13
C
3
5
R
8
1
R
8
2
R
8
3
R
8
4
U38 U39
C
4
6
C1
U1
C
2
C
3
U2 U3
C
4
U7
C
8
R41
C
1
2
C
1
8
R
5
8
C
2
6
U11
C15
U16
C23
U22
R76
R77
CR1
R78
U29
R79
R80
JP1 JP2
C
3
6
C
4
1
C
4
7
U34
U40
C
4
9
U42
SW2
RN4
U19
C
4
0
C
4
5
R
4
3
J
1
J
2
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m


t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
I
N
T
E
R
A
C
K
.
S
A
M
5
-
5
4
-
1
7
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-18 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\INTERACK.SAM
Echo Canceller
Not e:
For more information on the Echo Canceller option, please refer to the
following documents:
Echo Canceller Module Installation Guide 033-100212-001.
Circuit Matching Boards Installation Guide 033-100304-001.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\ECHO.SAM 5-54-19
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-54-20 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\ECHO.SAM
Cent ral St at i on
Menu I nt roduct i on
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM 5-55
SR500 TELECOM'S
TDMA
Subscriber Radio System
User Interface
Software Revision Level 6.0
Copyright 1987-94 by SR Telecom Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Learning system configuration Please wait ....
Approximately one minute after powering up the central
station, the following should be displayed on the video display
terminal and its keyboard should be enabled accordingly:
11-DEC-1994 SR500-SR-TELECOM- V6.0 16:57:30
User name : Login menu
User name :
Password :
Verify that the LEDs are in the normal operating condition with
no alarms indicated.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-56 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM
08-APR-1993 SR500 SR Telecom V6.00 16:55:30
User name Bill Root menu SupervUser
S. Status D. telephone Directory
A. Alarms C. Common channel
T. Test G. manaGement
O. Options F. System configuration
Y. sYstem control X. eXit (log-out)
N. Network interfaces
(N.B. Interactive menus are software version dependent)
For more information, see the appropriate SR500 Interactive Menus V x.x.
Operator's Guide and the Software Release Notices in chapter 11.
For software upgrade, refer to the SR500s Software upgrade
Installation Procedure 033-100103-001.
For software upgrade to the software version V7.x involving the
installation of a memory expansion module, refer also to
033-100049-001
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM 5-57
Net work Management Syst em - SR- NMS
Note:
For information on the Network Management System,
please refer to the SR-NMS Operator Guide,
SRT publication 033-100154-001.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-58 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05D.SAM
SLIM 10 Outstation
Operation
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-59
SR500-s Course Notes
5-60 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
SLI M 10 Out st at i on

SLIM 10 Outstation - Front View
(original version)
SLIM10FV.DS4
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DCINPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
Power Supply
Antenna Port ( DIN 7/16- or N-type)
12 Volts, 17 Ah Battery
SLIM Controller
VF/Data Interface Modules
Spare Slot
Inbound Transceiver:
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-61
SLIM Outstation and Repeater - Back View
(original version)
SLIMBV.DS4
1. SLIM Auxiliary Outstation
2. Standby SLIM Repeater (not equipped on outstations)
3. VF, Data, and External Alarm Signals
4. Data Signals
5. External Alarm Signals (SLIM Through Repeater only)
6. Entry Point for Conduit from SLIM Auxiliary
7. PJP Alarms
8. Entry Point for Conduit from Line Terminal Box
or for External Alarm Wires
9. DC Input Voltage
10. AC Input Voltage
11. Connector for Open-door Sensor
12. Entry Point for Cable from Power Source
13. Entry Point for Conduit from Standby SLIM Repeater
G N L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
SR500-s Course Notes
5-62 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\SLIM10.SAM 5-62-1
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-62-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\SLIM10.SAM
xxx-xxxx
yyy-yyyy
TX DATA
RX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX CLOCK
ALARMS
F1
F1'
S04\COSSBD.DS4 SR500 Outstation Simplified Block Diagram
line # 1
line # 2
BURST
CONTROL
CONTROLLER
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
POWER SUPPLY
4.864 Mbps
LTB
4.864 Mbps
PA/
DUPLEXER
LINE
MODULES
Krone
+13.6 or -13.6 VDC
or 120/240 VAC
or -18 to - 72 VDC
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
6
3
SR500-s Course Notes
5-64 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
SLIM Power Supply
(13. 6 VDC and 120/240 VAC
Input Voltage)
Note:
Other power supplies with different input voltage (i.e. 13.6 VDC only,
-48VDC, etc.) are available.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-65

SLIM Power Supply (e.g. 513275) - Front View
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DC INPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
DC Switch
AC Switch
Test Points
S10PSFV.DS4
+5.1 V 2%
-5.0 V 5%
+12 V 5%
-12 V 5%
+25 V 10%
-48 V 10%
0/5 V square wave;
same frequency as the ring generator.
Only when RING ENABLE is active.
10.5 to 17 VDC
Green LED Indicator
If ON, normal condition
If flashing, AC FAIL cond.
the P/S is operating from
the backup battery.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-66 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
SLIM Power Supply (e.g. SD513275) - Simplified block diagram
Input
Transient
Suppressor
Input voltage monitoring
Inactive if V < 10.25 0.25 V
Reset if V > 11.75 Volts 0.25 V
Inactive if V > 18.5Volts 1.5 V
Ring Enable
Sine wave
frequency
generator
adjusted by
R13, R14
(ring freq.)
15Hz to 50 Hz
and DC offset
+5.1 Volts 1.0 Amp.
-5 Volts 0.5 Amp.
+12 Volts 1.7 Amp.
-12 Volts 0.5 Amp.
DC/DC Switching
Converter
switching freq. 100kHz
Input : 12VDC
Outputs :
+/- 5 Volts
+/- 12 Volts
+25 Volts
- 48 Volts
Protection,
and Output Filters
+25 Volts 0.7 Amp.
90 Vrms. 110 mA.
DC/AC Converter
90 Vrms.
Current Limiter
Shunt Regulator
T
R
A
N
S
C
E
I
V
E
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
A
N
D
L
I
N
E
S
H
E
L
F
SLMAUXPS.DS4
GND
-48 Volts 1.0 Amp.
EMI
Filter
DC
Fuse
10A
NTC* thermistor
In-rush limiter
AC
Fuses
2A
AC/DC
Converter,
Battery
Charger
and
Temperature
Compensation
12 V, 17AH
Battery
Ring Clock
AC Input
47 Hz to
63 Hz
120 or
240 VAC
Neutral
e.g. SD513275
AC Fail
Sensor
AC Fail
Alarm
* Negative
Temperature
Coefficient
DC
Switch
AC
Switch
Ring Overload
J P 6
User Defined External Alarm #4 Open Crcuit
Closed Circuit
Detector
(isolated by
opto-couplers)
options:
Norm. Open (NO)
Norm. Closed (NC)
using JP1 to JP4
J P 5
User Defined External Alarm #3
User Defined External Alarm #2
User Defined External Alarm #1
Power Supply
Fail Sensor
Early Warning PF
Battery Test
Battery Voltage
Battery Temperature
External Shutdown
Battery Test
Temperat.
Sensor
OR
DC Voltage Proportional
to Temperature
TEMPS+
TEMPS-
BATTVS+
BATTVS-
High
Voltage
Relay
Disc.
Cut off
265
VAC
2 V
Power
Supply
Fail Alarm
Alarm D
Alarm C
Alarm B
Alarm A
DC INPUT TP
DC Input
13.6 VDC
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
6
7
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
6
8
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
6
9
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DC INPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
The cover of the SLIM power
supply is held in place by six
screws.
05-16E.DS4
SR500-s Course Notes
5-70 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
Set t ing t he Ext ernal Alarm Jumpers
1. With reference to the table below and the illustration on the adjacent
page, set jumpers 1 to 6. Note that:
a. Asterisks identify default settings.
b. Alarm 2 is reserved for reporting an open-door alarm when the
optional open-door sensor is equipped.
c. For alarm 3 to report a PS Fail alarm, JP3 and JP5 must be set to their
default settings.
d. For alarm 4 to report an AC Fail alarm, JP4 and JP6 must be set to
their default settings.

Jumper (Alarm) Jumper Position
JP1 (Alarm 1) NO* NC
JP2 (Alarm 2) NO* NC
JP3 (Alarm 3) NO NC*
JP4 (Alarm 4) NO NC*
Alarm 3 Assignment
JP 5 (PS Fail) AL3 PSF*
Alarm 4 Assignement
JP 6 (AC Fail) AL4 ACF*
2. Replace the power supply's cover and secure with screws.
3. Replace the Power supply in the SLIM station.

Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-71
JP2 JP5
JP3
JP1
JP6
JP4
N
C
N
C
N
C
N
0
A
L
4
A
L
3
N
C
A
C
F
P
S
F
N
0
N
0
N
0
The six jumpers for setting
the external alarms are located
on the power supply's PCB.
Position For Internal
AC Fail and P.S. Fail
Alarms Enabled is shown. 0
5
-
1
7
E
.
D
S
4
AC or DC SLIM Power Supply (e.g. 513275) - Option Settings
SR500-s Course Notes
5-72 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
2. 4 GHz Inbound
Transceiver
(old model)
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
Inbound Transceiver (2.4 GHz)- Front View
SLIMFV.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-73
SLIM Inbound Transceiver (2.4GHz) - Simplified Block Diagram
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, +25VDC
MODULAT.
I
Q
DEMODULATOR
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
LNA and
FILTER
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
XMT MODULE
RCV MODULE
-1.2 dB loss
-1.7 dB loss
RCV ALARM
NOTES:
DEPENDING ON PA OPTION
A PA IS MOUNTED ON THE
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR
GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS
REQUESTED.
SLIMINB.DS4
2
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
FREQUENCY
(PLL) CONTROL
RCV
FILTER
XMT
FILTER
BURST CONTROL
XMT POWER:
4W ( +35 dBm)
1W ( +30 dBm)
0.1W ( +20 dBm)
RCV POWER:
-92dBm < P rx <-45 dBm
INTERCONN.
LO/MOD
BURST CONTROL
RCV
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
PA
+28 dB gain
(2.5-2.7 GHz)
XMT
RF OUT
RCV
RF IN
1
1
LO MON
(SMA)
IB RX ALARM
RF SENSE
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
RCV
FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
(freq. conversion)
VCO
3
FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY
SENSITIVE
I
Q
3
3
LOW
POWER
AMPLIFIER
.1W (+20dBm)
IB RX OE
I Q STR
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
BUFFER
50 sec. or
130 sec.
CIRCULATOR
-0.4 dB loss
OQPSK
+23 dBm
RxFreq.
-10 dBm
OQPSK
-56 dBm
to
-19 dBm
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
NC ALARM
ND ALARM (Outbound only)
LO OUT
SMA
LO IN
GND
+-
PA
2
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
+-
Tx Freq.
0 dBm
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
7
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
Module 513390 ("XMT Baseband processor")
DATA
DATA
Jumper Use Position
Module 513325 (synthesizer)
Module 513345 (interconnect)
Module 513410 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 512450 (power amplifier 20 dBm)
(The transmitter is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects burst mode transmission ( for normal operation)
Selects continuous mode transmission ( for testing purpose)
JP2
Selects if transmit data is normal (usual position)
JP8
Selects if transmit frequency > receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit frequency < receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit data is inverted
JP5
Enable the TX clock signal (normal operation)
Open the TX clock path ( for testing purpose)
A
B
Inserted
Removed
TX > RX
TX < RX
JP3,4
JP6,7
Used for factory testing
Inserted
SLIMTXOP.DS4 Option Table for SLIM Transmitter #513330 (2.4 GHz)
Set the frequency to the transmit frequency
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
7
5
Module 513350 ("RCV processor IB")
Jumper Use Position
Module 512091 (BB amplifier filter)
Module 513410 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 513500 (buffer)
Module 513320 (frequency converter)
(The receiver is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects if receive data is normal D
SLIMTXO2.DS4 Option Table for SLIM Inbound Receiver #513335 (2.4 GHz)
Selects if receive data is inverted D
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
7
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
Tx Rx
SYNTHESIZED
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
Transmitter
First digit of
transmit
frequency
is permanently
set to either
1 or 2
2 3 1 6 0 0
JP8
JP8
Tx > Rx FREQ.
Tx < Rx FREQ.
SLIM Inbound Transceiver- Frequency Setting
FIG08.DS4
Frequency
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8 9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8 9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0 1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
0
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Note.
The 1.5 GHz has
only 4 switches.
The last one is for the
MHz fraction as
per this table: 0 =0.00
2 =0.25
5 =0.50
7 =0.75
Frequency
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8 9
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-77
Transmitter
JP2
DATA
DATA
DATA
JP2
DATA
JP3
JP4
J
P
1
TX>RX
TX<RX
JP8
J
P
5
J
P
8
B
A
INBOUND ONLY
Inbound Receiver
SLIM Inbound Transceivers - Option Settings
(e.g. 513390 iss.002)
(e.g. 513350 iss.005)
FIG08D.DS4
JP1
D D
JP1
D D
SR500-s Course Notes
5-78 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
SLIM Inbound 2.4 GHz Transceiver (PA/Duplexer not shown) - Front View
Tx
Rx
FIGTRFV.DS4
RCV IN
L.O. MON
Rx ALARM LED
L.O. IN
L.O. OUT
XMT OUT
XMT ALARM LED
(FromPA/Duplexer)
(To PA/Duplexer)
TPx (Future use)
TP3 Q
TP2 I
TP1 STR
TP4 GND
TP3 RF sense
TP2 NC alarm
TP1 ND alarm
(outbound only)
RF sense: 5V when it senses that the out put power is within
5 db of the nominal out put power; 0V otherwise.
No Clock (NC), No Data (ND) alarms:
(ND is for the outbound transceiver only)
5 V in alarmcondition
0 V in normal condition
(Rx Freq. approx. -10 dBm)
(Tx Freq. approx. 0 dBm)
On the transmitter:
On the receiver:
On the 513350 baseband processor, test points are I, Q and STR as shown on the next page.
On the 513351baseband processor, test points are PLL, VCXO,Q, I, AGC and RSS. Most test points
are for factory testing.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-79
STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock) STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock) STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock) STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock)
I Signal I Signal I Signal I Signal
5V 5V 5V 5V
Time Time Time Time
Time Time Time Time
Eye Pattern - Demonstration at the Inbound Transceiver
Notes:
1) When I is in the center of the bit, Q is at the symbol start/end (e.g. at a transition).
2) To display I or Q signals or both on an oscilloscope, it is easier to use STR
as an external trigger and a sweep rate of 0.2 microsec. per division.
EYE.DS4
Time Time Time Time
Q Signal Q Signal Q Signal Q Signal
SR500-s Course Notes
5-80 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
Non Integrated
Inbound Transceiver
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
Inbound Transceiver (1.5GHz) - Front View
1-5GHZFV.DS4
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM 5-80-1
SLIM Inbound Transceiver (1.5 GHz) - Simplified Block Diagram
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, +25VDC
MODULAT.
I
Q
DEMODULATOR
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
XMT MODULE
RCV MODULE
1.2 dB loss
1.2 dB loss
RCV ALARM
XMT ALARM
NOTES:
DEPENDING ON PA OPTION
A PA IS MOUNTED ON THE
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR
GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS
REQUESTED.
1-5GHZIN.DS4
2
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
FREQUENCY
(PLL) CONTROL
RCV
FILTER
XMT
FILTER
BURST CONTROL
XMT POWER:
4W ( +35 dBm)
1W ( +30 dBm)
0.1W ( +20 dBm)
RCV POWER:
-92dBm < P rx <-45 dBm
INTERCONN.
LO/MOD
BURST CONTROL
RCV
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
RF OUT
RCV
RF IN
1
1
LO MON
(SMA)
ND ALARM (outbound)
IB RX ALARM
RF SENSE
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
RCV
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
3
FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY
SENSITIVE
I
Q
3
3
IB RX OE
I RSS
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
LNA
50 sec. or
130 sec.
CIRCULATOR
0.4 dB loss
OQPSK
+23 dBm
-10 dBm
OQPSK
-93.5 dBm
to
-46.5 dBm
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
-10 dBm
LO MON
(SMA)
3
29 dB gain
VCXO AGC
PLL
AGND
Q
LOCK
DET.
NC ALARM
10MHz
REF.
VCXO
JP1 +5V
PA
2
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
+-
PA
LOW
POWER
AMPLIFIER
.1W (+20dBm)
+-
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
0
-
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
1
-
5
G
H
Z
.
S
A
M
Module 513725 ("XMT Baseband processor")
DATA
DATA
Jumper Use Position
Module 513720 (synthesizer)
Module 513345 (interconnect)
Module 513625 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 512101 (power amplifier 20 dBm)
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects burst mode transmission ( for normal operation)
Selects continuous mode transmission ( for testing purpose)
JP2
Selects if transmit data is normal (usual position)
JP8
Selects if transmit frequency > receive frequency
Selects if transmit frequency < receive frequency
Selects if transmit data is inverted
JP5
Enable the TX clock signal (normal operation)
Open the TX clock path ( for testing purpose)
N
H
Inserted
Removed
TX > RX
TX < RX
JP3,4
JP6,7
Used for factory testing
Inserted
1-5TXOP.DS4 Option Table for SLIM Transmitter #513616 (1.5 GHz)
JP9
Transmitter located on inbound equipment
Transmitter located on outbound equipment
IB
OB
Set the frequency to the transmit frequency
(The transmitter is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
1
-
5
G
H
Z
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
0
-
3
Module 513351 ("QPSK RCV processor IB")
Jumper Use Position
Module 513735 (BB amplifier filter)
Module 513625 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 513600 (LNA)
Module 513715 (synthesizer)
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects if receive data is normal D
1-5RXOP.DS4 Option Table for SLIM Inbound Receiver #513635 (1.5 GHz)
Selects if receive data is inverted D
JP2 Ground connection Inserted
(The receiver is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
0
-
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
1
-
5
G
H
Z
.
S
A
M
Tx Rx
SYNTHESIZED
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
Transmitter
First digit of
transmit
frequency
is permanently
set to either
1 or 2
1 4 2 8 7 5
JP8
JP8
Tx > Rx
Tx < Rx
SLIM Inbound Transceiver- Frequency Setting
1-5-08.DS 4
Frequency
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0 =0.00
2 =0.25
5 =0.50
7 =0.75
Frequency
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8 9
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Note:
The 1.5 GHz and other
transceivers have only
4 switches. For the
1.5 GHz, the last one is
for the MHz fraction as
per this table:
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM 5-80-5
Transmitter
JP2
DATA
DATA
DATA
JP2
DATA
JP3
JP4
J
P
1
TX>RX
TX<RX
JP8
J
P
5
JP8
H
N
Inbound Receiver
SLIM Inbound Transceivers - Option Settings
(e.g. 513725)
(e.g. 513351)
1-5-08D.DS4
JP2
JP1
B
U
R
S
T
JP9
OB
JP9
IB
D(DATA)
D
D(DATA)
D
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-80-6 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM
SLIM Inbound Transceiver (1.5 GHz - PA/Duplexer not shown) - Front View
Tx
Rx
1-5TRFV.DS4
RCV IN
L.O. MON
RCV ALARM LED
L.O. MON
XMT OUT
XMT ALARM LED
(FromPA/Duplexer)
(To PA/Duplexer)
TP1 AGND
TP2 PLL
TP3 VCXO
TP4 Q
TP5 I
TP6 AGC
TP7 RSS
TP4 GND
TP3 RF sense
TP2 NC alarm
TP1 ND alarm
(outbound only)
RF sense: 5V when it senses that the out put power is within 5 db of the nominal out put power
No Clock (NC), No Data (ND) alarms:
(ND is for the outbound transceiver only)
5 V in alarmcondition
0 V in normal condition
Rx frequency
at -10 dBm
Tx frequency
at -10 dBm
Transmitter:
0V when it senses that the out put power is more than 5 db lower than the nominal out put power.
Most test points are for factory testing.
Receiver:
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM 5-80-7
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-80-8 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM
I ntegrated
Inbound
Transceiver
PA/Duplexer
Integrated Inbound Transceiver - Front View
1-5INTFV.DS4
Transceiver
Receiver
Input
Transmitter
Output
Power Amplifier
Optional Output Power:
20, 30 or 35 dBm
TX Filter
RX Filter
To the Antenna Port
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM 5-80-9
Integrated Inbound Transceiver - Simplified Block Diagram
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, +25VDC
MODULATOR
I
Q
DEMODULATOR
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
TRANSCEIVER MODULE
1.2 dB loss
20MHz
1.2 dB loss
20 MHz
NOTES:
XMT POWER:
4W( +35 dBm)
1W( +30 dBm)
0.1W( +20 dBm)
DEPENDING ON THE PA OPTION
15GHZINT.DS4
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
RCV
FILTER
XMT
FILTER
BURST CONTROL
RCV POWER:
-92dBm < PRX < -45 dBm
BURST CONTROL
CARRIER and CLOCK REC.
BASE BAND PROCESSOR.
XMT
RF OUT
RCV
RF IN
1
LO MON
(SMB)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
RCV
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
2
FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY
SENSITIVE
I
Q
2
2
IB RX OEN
I RSSI
LNA
50 sec. or
130 sec.
CIRCULATOR
0.4 dB loss
OQPSK
+15 dBm
-10 dBm
OQPSK
-93 dBm
to
-44 dBm
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
-10 dBm
LO MON
(SMB)
27 dB gain
GND Q
10MHz REF.
(temperature
compensated)
JP675
+5V
PA
1
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
+-
LIMITER
RF SENSE
RCV ALARM
RCV_LD
4.864MHz
PLL
VCXO
ALARM
e.g. 515175 (1.5 GHz)
e.g. 515345 (1.5 GHz)
XMT ALARM
MICRO-CONTROLLER
COM_SYNT_TX
COM_SYNT_RX
XMT_LD
4
POWER
CONV.
+25 VDC
3
+10.8 VDC
3
BB
FILTERS
VCTRL
4
.
8
6
4
M
H
z
C
L
K
EEPROM
(TX and RX freq.)
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
0
-
1
0
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
1
-
5
G
H
Z
.
S
A
M
Module 515175 Integrated Transceiver 1.5GHz
Jumper Use Position
JP675
Selects burst mode transmission ( for normal operation)
Selects continuous mode transmission ( for testing purpose)
JP698
Selects if transmit data is normal (usual position)
JP603
Selects if transmit data is inverted
JP674
Enable the TX clock signal (normal operation)
Open the TX clock path ( for testing purpose)
N
H
Inserted
Removed
D
Used for factory testing Inserted
15INTOP.DS4
Option Table for the Integrated Transceiver
JP604
JP605
JP606
JP607
Selects if receive data is normal (usual position)
Selects if receive data is inverted
D
Module 515165 Power Amplifier for the Integrated Transceiver 1.5GHz
Option 001: +20 dBm
Option 002: +30 dBm
Option 003: +35 dBm
D
D
JP699
Transceiver used on main equipment
Transceiver used on standby equipment
On (equipped)
Off (not equipped)
Module 514910 Integrated Transceiver 2.4GHz
Module 514895 Power Amplifier for the Integrated Transceiver 2.4GHz
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
1
-
5
G
H
Z
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
0
-
1
1
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
0
-
1
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
1
-
5
G
H
Z
.
S
A
M
Integrated Inbound Transceiver - Indicators
1-5INTTP.DS4
NOTE:
RF Sense is 5 Volts when the sensed output power is within 6dB 2 dB approximately
from the nominal output power. Otherwise, it would be 0 Volt.
PA/Duplexer
Transceiver
RSSI
Q
I
RCV
Alarm
LED
XMT
Alarm
LED
RF Sense
25V/12V/10.8V/9.5V
NOTE:
9.5V for option 001
25V for option 002
10.8V for option 003
12V for option 004
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM 5-80-13
I Signal I Signal I Signal I Signal
Time Time Time Time
Eye Pattern - Demonstration at the Inbound Transceiver
Notes:
1) When I is in the center of the bit, Q is at the symbol start/end (e.g. at a transition).
2) To display I or Q signals or both on an oscilloscope, it is easier to use STR
as an external trigger and a sweep rate of 0.2 microsec. per division.
EYE2.DS4
Time Time Time Time
Q Signal Q Signal Q Signal Q Signal
nOTE
The RSSI signal is a DC voltage 0 to 5 V proportionnal to the RXlevel. Its accurracy is
aproximatively 5dB. A received level of -80 dBmwill yield typically a DC voltage of 1Volt with
an increase of 1volt per 10 dB of receive RF level ( -70 dbm=2V, -60 dBm=3V, -50 dBm=4V).
It may be used to align the directional antenna for maximumreceive level.
RSSI (Receive Signal Strenght Indicator):
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-80-14 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\1-5GHZ.SAM
Other
Transcei vers
Not e:
For more information on other transceivers, please refer to the following
documents:
For the 10.5 GHz AIM:
10.5 GHz Descriptive Information 033-100035-001
AIM Installation Guide 033-100306-001
Pole Mount Kits for 10.5 GHz Panel Antennas 033-100116-006.
For the 3.5 GHz and 10.5 GHz AIR:
AIR Installation Guide 033-100248-001
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERTRA.SAM 5-80-15
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-80-16 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\OTHERTRA.SAM
SLI M Cont rol l er
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM 5-81

SLIM Controller Module (e.g. 513260) - Front View
Station Address Decade Switches
Receive Synchronization (red) LED
Autotime (red) LED
Alarm (red) LED
Transmit Burst Enable (yellow) LED
2-Wire VF or Orderwire
2-Wire VF or Prepay(12 or 16 kHz)
FIGCOFV.DS4
x 100
x 10
x 1
The controller SD513261is similar but the first line can be
an order wire, a 2-wire VF or a prepay (12 or 16 KHz) line.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-82 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. SD513260) - Simplified Block Diagram
TX signalling(M)
Memory
RX signalling(E)
Memory
TX PCM Memory
64 PCM samples/trunk
MUX
DEMUX
MB0/MB1
TX memory
MB0/MB1
RX memory
MUX
Scrambler
DEMUX
(UW Detector)
Descrambler
RX PCM Memory
32 PCM samples/trunk
DATA
CLOCK
(PLL1)
614.4 KhZ
DTCLK
(PLL2)
96 Khz
or 112 kHz
EPROM
128K x 16
80C186
CPU
25 MHz
clock
Xtal
(CPU)
RAM
128K x 16
+
NVRAM
128K x 16
Maint.
&
Diag.
Mode
x100
x10
x1
DB-9
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
BURST CTRL
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
ring
relay
control
polarity
relay
control
off/on hook
dial pulses
detector
off hook
during ring
detector
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
VF T S D
ring
relay
control
polarity
relay
control
LOOP
ASIC
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL
TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL
SLIMCON3.DS4
EXT.
User
Alarms
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
DATA BUS,
ADDRESS BUS,
WR, RD, LCE
1/2
DSLAC
TXINT
TXTONE
RXINT
RXTONE
Dip Sw.
and
Config.
Switches
To thelinetester
1/2
DSLAC
RJ
12
Line
Tester
and
Battery
Tester
SUPER ASIC
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
TXINT
TXTONE
RXINT
RXTONE
DSLAC
and
DTMF
decoders
Tone Bank
12/16
kHz
gen.
det.
I CC
CLOCKS FOR
DSLAC, etc.
Digital
Combiner
Digital
Splitter
AUX.
balanced
drivers
AUX.
balanced
detectors
8.192
MHz
Xtal
(DSLAC)
3.579
MHz
Xtal
(DTMF
decoders)
Fromtheauxiliary
via balanced detectors
To/fromtheauxiliary
via balanced
drivers and detectors.
Intracall
Interface
To/fromtheauxiliary
BUFFER FOR LINE SHELF
To theauxiliary
via balanced drivers
RJ
12
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, -12VDC
-48VDC
RING VOLT. RING CLOCK
off hook
during ring
detector
off/on hook
dial pulses
detector
9.728
MHz
Xtal
(OPT)
TXDAT
RXDAT
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
LEDS
Station
Address
Switches
4
/
11
/
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
3
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
5
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
7
This page has been left blank intentionally
SR500-s Course Notes
5-88 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
E
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
9
FIXED SETTINGS FOR
513261-X X X X X X
TABLE 1 TYPE OF IMPEDANCE & TRANSMISSION
#
0
400 OHM + (500 OHM//50 NF)
275 OHM + (850 OHM//150 NF)
270 OHM + (910 OHM//120 NF)
IMPEDANCE TYPE
220 OHM + (820 OHM//115 NF)
220 OHM + (820 OHM//120 NF)
1
TYPE
440 OHM + (500 OHM//50 NF)
IMPENDANCE
600 OHM
900 OHM
TRANSMISSION TYPE
TYPE LOSS BETWEEN CS & RS
STANDARD, 3dB
1
2 2dB
(SEE IMPEDANCE
LINE IMPEDANCE
(SEE TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION TYPE
STANDARD
1
TYPE 1 TYPE 1 732
3dB
TABLE) TABLE)
732
2
TYPE 1 TYPE 2
2dB
90.9K
23.7K
R163, 164 R143, 180
- -
TABLE 2 TONE DETECTION
#
0
1
TONE DETECTOR
NOT EQ.
12 kHz
FUTURE USE
C53,57,58,60,63,64,
102,113
75,79,82,90,91,96,
2
3
4
5
FUTURE USE
FUTURE USE
16 kHz
-
470pF
-
-
-
470pF
69,76,80,
0.1F
0.1F
-
-
-
-
1F
1F
-
-
-
C56,81
-
C55,68,
95,98,101
4700pF
4700pF
-
-
-
C59,83
-
1.5NF
-
-
-
1.5NF
-
C72,94
1NF
-
-
-
1NF
-
C73,97
100K
-
-
-
100K
-
R70,74
1M
-
-
-
1M
-
R84,106
10M
10M
-
-
-
R79,98
-
10.2K
10.2K
-
-
-
R82,103
-
12.1K
12.1K
-
-
-
R78,105
-
17.8K
13.3K
-
-
-
R80,99
-
210K
210K
-
-
-
R75,94
-
316K
316K
-
-
-
R85,107
-
89,92
8.66K
8.66K
-
-
-
104,118
-
R76,83
U35,42
MC33172
MC33172
XR2211
XR2211
-
-
-
U36,43
-
-
-
-
-
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
TABLE 2 TONE DETECTION (CON'T)
SEE TABLE 1
SEE TABLE 2
SEE TABLE 3
SEE TABLE 6
SEE TABLE 5
SEE TABLE 4
513261TA.DS4
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. 513261) - Option Tables
R81,100
-
-
-
10K
-
JR4, 5
-
-
-
0 OHM
-
-
10K
0.027F
.0027F
C132, 137
-

A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
9
-
1
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
M/D
M/D
M/D
M/D

FIXED SETTINGS FOR


513261-X X X X X X
SEE TABLE 1
SEE TABLE 2
SEE TABLE 3
SEE TABLE 6
SEE TABLE 5
SEE TABLE 4
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. 513261) - Option Tables 513261TB.DS4
TABLE 3 TONE GENERATION & TRANSMISSION
#
TONE GENERATOR
FREQUENCY LEVEL
-
12 kHz
0.5 V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NOT EQ.
16 kHz
2.5 V
NOT USED
2.0 V
C122,123
.022F
-
.022F
.022F
-
.022F
.022F
C114
4700pF
4700pF
4700pF
4700pF
4.7NF
-
4700pF
.022F
0.1F
-
-
0.1F
0.1F
0.1F
0.1F
0.1F
C108,112,
115,120
C118
1NF
-
1NF
1NF
1NF
1NF
1NF
-
10K
R135
-
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
-
R148
-
-
16.2K
16.2K
16.2K
16.2K
16.2K
16.2K
R126,132
16.9K
-
16.9K
16.9K
-
12.7K
12.7K
12.7K 2.0 V
2.5 V
0.5 V
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TABLE 3 TONE GENERATION & TRANSMISSION (CON'T)
R119,136
-
475K
357K
-
152,162
-
100K
475K
475K
357K
357K
R147,149,
28K
100K
28K
34K
36.5K
-
R115,131
-
8.45K
8.45K
8.45K
6.34K
-
6.34K
6.34K
L3,4
-
-
3mH
U54
-
MC33114 74HC4053
-
U51,58
3mH
3mH
3mH
3mH
3mH
MC33114 74HC4053
MC33114 74HC4053
MC33114 74HC4053
MC33114 74HC4053
MC33114 74HC4053
MC33114 74HC4053
Q7,13
TABLE 4 HOWLER TONE & LOOP THRESHOLD
2
5
7
6
4
3
HOWLER
NOT EQ.
TONE
0
1
#
THRESHOLD
EQ.
25 mA
EQ 2.67K 20K 102K 10K
10K
10K
-
10K
1K
-
-
-
- -
R134,165
R232,234,
3.32K
304,309
332
-
-
R140,176
-
-
141,177,178
-
-
7.5 W
Q25-28 R174,182
-
- -
LOOP
NOT EQ.
NOT EQ.
EQ. @ 20 dB
NOT EQ.
NOT EQ.
EQ. @ 20 dB
EQ. @ 20 dB
EQ. @ 20 dB
EQ.
NOT EQ.
EQ.
NOT EQ.
EQ.
NOT EQ.
LIMIT
LOOP CURRENT
25 mA
25 mA
25 mA
50 mA
238,240
R227,229,
-
332
332
-
332
-
3.32K
3.32K
-
-
-
102K
102K
102K
R130,139,181,
20K
20K
20K
2.67K
2.67K
2.67K
-
- -
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
-
-
Q9-12
EQ
-
EQ
EQ
-
-
EQ EQ
-
-
EQ
EQ
-
EQ
1K
1K
1K
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
9
-
2
TABLE 5 CONTROLLER MODE
10K
10K
10K
10K
R72,207,
2
3
1
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH NO OW
CONTROLLER MODE
0
#
33pF
C119
HIGH CAPACITY OUTSTATION
-
-
87,88,106,107,
42,43,49,51,
-
62,100,
110,111
0.1F
C44
- -
0
0
-
R231,
1K
86,90,
121
-
R38,87
-
-
R81,100
-
C50,61,
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH OW
SLIM 10 OS. SLIM 34 OS
SLIM AUX. OS. & SLIM DROP RPTR
0.1F
0.1F
0.1F
C21,23,24,26,
116,124,125,134
0.1F
0.1F
-
-
0.1uF 33pF
R71,73,
1K
1K
1K
268
1K
1K
210,245,
248
10K
10K 100K
100K
R114,120
-
-
R151,155
-
-
R113,145
200K
95-97
200K
-
-
RN8,9
4X100
100K
100K
200K
200K
4X100
R91,
11
-
-
46
U32,37
U16,21
26,5
U38,22 U20
#
CONTROLLER MODE
SLIM AUX. OS. & SLIM DROP RPTR
SLIM 10 OS. SLIM 34 OS
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH OW
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH NO OW
3
1
2
0
U26,49
74AC541
128K,120nS
DTMF
U50,55
-
-
-
74NC541
74NC541
-
-
TABLE 5 CONTROLLER MODE (CON'T)
U9,
U28
74NC154
26C32AT
U27,34,
26C31T
26C31T
U11,17,
-
-
-
-
U44
INASICFP
-
-
74NC138
U62
-
-
C177,180 C176,179 X1
#
CONTROLLER MODE
SLIM AUX. OS. & SLIM DROP RPTR
SLIM 10 OS. SLIM 34 OS
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH OW
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH NO OW
3
1
2
0
4.7F
C170
25MHz
J4
- -
-
-
-
TABLE 5 CONTROLLER MODE (CON'T)
C163,171
0.1F
0.1F
138,157,159,164,
-
153,160,162,
-
DSLAC
DSLAC
U52
TNBOC
U2
16mHz -
-
16mHz
16mHz
74AC541
74AC541
74AC541
-
-
74NC541 74AC541
74AC541
33,59
74NC541
74NC541
74NC541
45
74NC541
74NC541 26C32AT
INASICFP
INASICFP
INASICFP
- -
X3 J3
-
-
-
-
25MHz
25MHz
40MHz 45MHz
45MHz 6P6C
6P6C 6P6C
6P6C
6P6C
C172 C161,169
4.935F -
4.7F
4.7F
4.7F
4.7F
- 4.935F
4.935F
4.935F
15F
15F
15F
4.935F
4.935F
15F
15F
-
-
C117,128,130,131,
168,175
C136,140,147-149
165,173
0.1F
0.1F
0.1F
0.1F
HIGH CAPACITY OUTSTATION
HIGH CAPACITY OUTSTATION
FIXED SETTINGS FOR
513261-X X X X X X
SEE TABLE 1
SEE TABLE 2
SEE TABLE 3
SEE TABLE 6
SEE TABLE 5
SEE TABLE 4
513261TC.DS4
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. 513261) - Option Tables
0 200K
200K
4X100
4X100
128K,120nS
128K,120nS
128K,90nS 74HC541
U5
-
-
74HC541
65, 70
-
C38, 49,
0.1F
0.1F
0.1F
R69
-
1K
1K
1K

A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
9
-
3
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
2
1
NOT EQ.
LOOP TESTER
0
#
-
JP5,6
-
100 V LOOP TEST RANGE
50 V LOOP TEST RANGE
EQ
TABLE 6 LOOP TESTER OPTIONS
-
C77
15uF
-
C8,12,13,19,20,
71,74,78,89
29-31,33,41,45,
-
C40
100uF
-
C7
220NF
R133
-
JR2,3
49.9K
-
281
1K
-
R166,
-
R37,43,
10K
10
.01uF
C27,28,
32,35
-
EQ
.01uF
C52,54
.1uF
.1uF 15uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
4700pF
C34
-
1uF
1uF
C11
-
10pF
10pF
-
C39
-
47NF
47NF 4700pF
C105
100uF 220NF
93
1K
1K 100K 1K 10K
-
TABLE 5 - CONTROLLER MODE (CON'T)
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH NO OW
HIGH CAPACITY OUTSTATION
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH OW
SLIM 10 OS. SLIM 34 OS
SLIM AUX. OS. & SLIM DROP RPTR
CONTROLLER MODE
1
2
3
#
0
T3
MC33178
U56
-
U57 T2 Q14,30
T092
- - -
3904
2W
TO92
TO92
Q15,32 Q34,41
- -
-
TO92
TO92 252AA
-
3904
3904
-
-
MC33178
MC33178
MC33178
MC33178
-
-
2W
2W
2W 2W
2W
-
-
252AA
252AA
Q37,42
252AA
-
252AA
Q29,35
250MW
250MW
250MW
Q31,38 Q16-19 Q20-23
250MW
250MW
-
3904
3904
250MW
250MW
Q43
-
250MW
250MW
-
Q44
-
250MW
250MW
-
250MW
Q36
250MW M/D
TABLE 5 - CONTROLLER MODE (CON'T)
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH NO OW
SLIM THROUGH RPTR WITH OW
SLIM 10 OS. SLIM 34 OS
SLIM AUX. OS. & SLIM DROP RPTR
CONTROLLER MODE
1
2
3
#
0
-
250MW
250MW
24V
24V
Q39
-
24V
-
K7,9
-
-
24V
24V
11,13 10,12
K6,8
HIGH CAPACITY OUTSTATION
M/D
FIXED SETTINGS FOR
513261-X X X X X X
SEE TABLE 1
SEE TABLE 2
SEE TABLE 3
SEE TABLE 6
SEE TABLE 5
SEE TABLE 4
513261TD.DS4
SLIM Controller Module. (e.g. 513261) - Option Tables
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
9
-
4
FIXED SETTINGS FOR
513261-X X X X X X
SEE TABLE 1
SEE TABLE 2
SEE TABLE 3
SEE TABLE 6
SEE TABLE 5
SEE TABLE 4
513261TE.DS4
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. 513261) - Option Tables

249K
249K
R64
TABLE 6 LOOP TESTER OPTIONS (CON'T)
50 V LOOP TEST RANGE
100 V LOOP TEST RANGE
LOOP TESTER
NOT EQ.
2
1
0
#
1M
R62,67,
68,122
-
10.2K
10.2K
R35,36
-
12.1K
12.1K
R32,39
-
2K
2K
R28,
150K
150K
R56
-
17.8K
17.8K
-
R42
20K
20K
- -
R88,124,
200K
200K
-
54,57
R58
3.32K
3.32K
- -
511
511
R46,52
-
R50
51.1K
51.1K
44,47,
55
-
56.2K
56.2K
-
1M 100K
100K
123
R48,
-
124K
124K
-
R63
34 125
R17,49,
R30,31,
ADC0804
ADC0804
U12
TABLE 6 LOOP TESTER OPTIONS (CON'T)
NOT EQ.
LOOP TESTER
100 V LOOP TEST RANGE
50 V LOOP TEST RANGE
0
2
1
#
6.34K
-
R77
4X200
4X200
RN4
9.09K
9.09K
-
10K
10K
-
R45 RN12
110V
110V
- - -
75V, 450mA
RV1,2
CR2-5,8,9,26,
U6,10
EQ
EQ
-
74NC4057
-
CR1
-
U4
-
U7
TLO84I
TLO84I
-
U18,24
6.34K
12,16,18,23
75V, 450mA
74HC574
74HC574 74NC4057 74HC541
74HC541
-
NC33172
MC33172
-
U19
CA124
CA124
-
U40,41
T1
EQ
EQ
-
EQ
EQ
Q2-6
40
-
EQ
EQ
K1-5
-
SW1
8
ON
OFF
-
A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
9
-
5
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
9
-
6
DEFAULT #
6
48 kbps
56 kbps A
B OFF
ON
X
DATA RATE
SW1
#
5 4 3
APPLICATION
80-174 km
160-264 km
240-354 km
320-444 km
400-534 km
480-624 km
560-714 km
E
H
X
G
F
UPON
D
C
A
B
0-84 km
DISTANCE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON OFF OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
X
COARSE DELAY SW1
DEFAULT
VOLTAGE RANGE
A
B
#
100V
50V
DEFAULT
8
OFF
ON
SW1
X
#
A
B
INCREASE LOW
END ACCURACY
RESOLUTION
STANDARD
LOOP TESTER RESOLUTION
REFER TO OPERATING MODE TABLE
DEFAULT
X
COMPANDING LAW
REFER TO OPERATING MODE TABLE
LAW
A A
#
DEFAULT
X

B
VARIABLE SETTINGS FOR 513261
SLIM Controller Module (e.j. 513261) - Option Tables
513261TG.DS4
A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
8
9
-
7
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
m
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
2
6
1
O
T
.
S
A
M
5
-
8
9
-
8
SLIM
Controller
COARSE DELAY
DISTANCE
INTERVALS
SLIM
CONTROLLER
SETTING
(km)
5 4 3
000 - 084
080 - 174
160 - 264
240 - 354
320 - 444
400 - 534
480 - 624
560 - 714
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SLIM Outstation Controller - Coarse Delay Setting
FIG09.DS4
SW 4 (SD513260)
For SW1or 4 - 1,2,6,7,8
meaning, refer to the
option table.
SW 1 (SD513261)
SR500-s Course Notes
5-90 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05E.SAM
SLIM 34 Outstation
Operation
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-91
SR500-s Course Notes
5-92 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLI M 34 Out st at i on
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-93
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-93-1 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\SLIM34.SAM

Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\SLIM34.SAM 5-93-2
The SLIM 34 operation is similar to the SLIM 10 but it provides 8 positions
for line modules (instead of 2 positions for the SLIM 10). The first 4
positions can have VF Interface modules and the last 4 positions can have
VF or DATA Interface modules. Modules are the same as for the SLIM 10.
The SLIM 34 remote station operates from an input voltage of
13.6 VDC (with SD 513305 power supply)
or
-18 to -72 VDC (with SD 513455 power supply)
or
120 VAC or 240 VAC using an external Power Pack
Power Pack output voltage is +13.6 VDC or -48 VDC
See the Field Service Manual for more information on the SLIM 34.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-94 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLI M Auxi l i ary
Operation
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-95
SR500-s Course Notes
5-96 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLI M Auxi l i ary
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DCINPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
VF or Data Interface Modules
Power Supply
SLIM Oustation Controller
12 Volts, 17 Ah Battery
SLIM Auxiliary - Front View FIG03.DS4
VF Interface Modules
(original version)
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-97
SR500-s Course Notes
5-98 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM Power Supply
(13. 6 VDC and 120/240 VAC
Input Voltage)
Note:
Other power supplies with different input voltage (i.e. 13.6 VDC only,
-48VDC, etc.) are available.
SLIM Power Supply - Front View
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DC INPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
DC Switch
AC Switch
Test Points
SAUXPSFV.DS4
+5.1 V 2%
-5.0 V 5%
+12 V 5%
-12 V 5%
+25 V 10%
-48 V 10%
0/5 V square wave;
same frequency as the ring generator.
Only when RING ENABLE is active.
10.5 to 17 VDC
Green LED Indicator
If ON, normal condition
If flashing, AC FAIL cond.
the P/S is operating from
the backup battery.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-99
SLIM Power Supply (e.g. SD513275) - Simplified block diagram
Input
Transient
Suppressor
Input voltage monitoring
Inactive if V < 10.25 0.25 V
Reset if V > 11.75 Volts 0.25 V
Inactive if V > 18.5Volts 1.5 V
Ring Enable
Sine wave
frequency
generator
adjusted by
R56,57
(ring freq.)
15Hz to 50 Hz
and DC offset
+5.1 Volts 1.0 Amp.
-5 Volts 0.5 Amp.
+12 Volts 1.7 Amp.
-12 Volts 0.5 Amp.
DC/DC Switching
Converter
switching freq. 100kHz
Input : 12VDC
Outputs :
+/- 5 Volts
+/- 12 Volts
+25 Volts
- 48 Volts
90 Volts
Protection,
and Output Filters
+25 Volts 0.7 Amp.
90 Vrms. 110 mA.
DC/AC Converter
90 Vrms.
Current Limiter
Shunt Regulator
T
R
A
N
S
C
E
I
V
E
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
A
N
D
L
I
N
E
S
H
E
L
F
SLMAUXPS. DS4
GND
-48 Volts 1.0 Amp.
EMI
Filter
DC
Fuse
10A
NTC* thermistor
In-rush limiter
AC
Fuses
2A
AC/DC
Converter,
Battery
Charger
and
Temperature
Compensation
12 V, 17AH
Battery
Ring Clock
AC Input
47 Hz to
63 Hz
120 or
240 VAC
Neutral
90 VDC
e.g. SD513275
AC Fail
Sensor
AC Fail
Alarm
* Negative
Temperature
Coefficient
DC
Switch
AC
Switch
Ring Overload
JP 6
User Defined External Alarm #4 Open Crcuit
Closed Circuit
Detector
(isolated by
opto-couplers)
options:
Norm. Open (NO)
Norm. Closed (NC)
using JP1 to JP4
JP 5
User Defined External Alarm #3
User Defined External Alarm #2
User Defined External Alarm #1
Power Supply
Fail Sensor
Early Warning PF
Battery Test
Battery Voltage
Battery Temperature
External Shutdown
Battery Test
Temperat.
Sensor
OR
DC Voltage Proportional
to Temperature
TEMPS+
TEMPS-
BATTVS+
BATTVS-
High
Voltage
Relay
Disc.
Cut off
265
VAC
2 V
Power
Supply
Fail Alarm
Alarm D
Alarm C
Alarm B
Alarm A
DC INPUT TP
DC Input
13.6 VDC
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
0
0
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
SLI M Cont rol l er
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. 513260) - Front View
Station Address Decade Switches
Receive Synchronization (red) LED
Autotime (red) LED
Alarm (red) LED
Transmit Burst Enable (yellow) LED
2-Wire VF or Orderwire
2-Wire VF or Prepay(12 or 16 kHz)
FIGCOFV2.DS4
x 100
x 10
x 1
The controller SD513261is similar but the first line can be
an order wire, a 2-wire VF or a prepay (12 or 16 KHz) line.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-101
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. SD513260) - Simplified Block Diagram
TX signalling(M)
Memory
RX signalling(E)
Memory
TX PCM Memory
64 PCM samples/trunk
MUX
DEMUX
MB0/MB1
TX memory
MB0/MB1
RX memory
MUX
Scrambler
DEMUX
(UW Detector)
Descrambler
RX PCM Memory
32 PCM samples/trunk
DATA
CLOCK
(PLL1)
614.4 KhZ
DTCLK
(PLL2)
96 Khz
or 112 kHz
EPROM
128K x 16
80C186
CPU
25 MHz
clock
Xtal
(CPU)
RAM
128K x 16
+
NVRAM
128K x 16
Maint.
&
Diag.
Mode
x100
x10
x1
DB-9
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
ring
relay
control
polarity
relay
control
off/on hook
dial pulses
detector
off hook
during ring
detector
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
VF T S D
ring
relay
control
polarity
relay
control
LOOP
ASIC
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL
TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL
SLIMCON2.DS4
EXT.
User
Alarms
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
DATA BUS,
ADDRESS BUS,
WR, RD, LCE
1/2
DSLAC
TXINT
TXTONE
RXINT
RXTONE
Dip Sw.
and
Config.
Switches
To theline tester
1/2
DSLAC
RJ
12
Line
Tester
and
Battery
Tester
SUPER ASIC
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
TXINT
TXTONE
RXINT
RXTONE
DSLAC
and
DTMF
decoders
Tone Bank
12/16
kHz
gen.
det.
I CC
CLOCKS FOR
DSLAC, etc.
Digital
Combiner
Digital
Splitter
AUX.
balanced
drivers
AUX.
balanced
detectors
8.192
MHz
Xtal
(DSLAC)
3.579
MHz
Xtal
(DTMF
decoders)
To theMaster
via balanced
drivers
To/fromtheMaster
via balanced
drivers and detectors.
Intracall
Interface
To/fromtheMaster
BUFFER FOR LINE SHELF
FromMaster
via balanced
detectors
RJ
12
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, -12VDC
-48VDC
RING VOLT. RING CLOCK
off hook
during ring
detector
off/on hook
dial pulses
detector
9.728
MHz
Xtal
(OPT)
TXDAT
RXDAT
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
LEDS
Station
Address
Switches
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
0
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
0
3
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
0
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
0
5
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
0
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
0
7

SLIM
Controller
COARSE DELAY
DISTANCE
INTERVALS
SLIM
CONTROLLER
SETTING
(km)
5 4 3
000 - 084
080 - 174
160 - 264
240 - 354
320 - 444
400 - 534
480 - 624
560 - 714
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
12345678
SLIM Outstation Controller - Coarse Delay Setting
FIG09.DS4
SW 4
For SW4 - 1,2,6,7,8
meaning, see the
option table
SR500-s Course Notes
5-108 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM Repeater
Operation
Not e
Two different SLIM repeaters are available: the SLIM drop repeater and the
SLIM through repeater.
The SLIM through repeater is a subset of the SLIM drop repeater, hence
only the drop repeater is covered in this section.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-109
SR500-s Course Notes
5-110 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM Repeater

SLIM Drop Repeater - Front View
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DCINPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
Repeater Controller
SLIM Controller
Line/Data Modules
Inbound Transceiver:
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
Power Supply
Inbound Antenna Port
Outbound Transceiver:
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
Outbound Antenna Port
SLIMREFV.DS4
(original version)
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-111

SLIM Outstation and Repeater - Back View
(original version)
SLIMBV.DS4
1. SLIM Auxiliary Outstation
2. Standby SLIM Repeater (not equipped on outstations)
3. VF, Data, and External Alarm Signals
4. Data Signals
5. External Alarm Signals (SLIM Through Repeater only)
6. Entry Point for Conduit from SLIM Auxiliary
7. PJP Alarms
8. Entry Point for Conduit from Line Terminal Box
or for External Alarm Wires
9. DC Input Voltage
10. AC Input Voltage
11. Connector for Open-door Sensor
12. Entry Point for Cable from Power Source
13. Entry Point for Conduit from Standby SLIM Repeater
G N L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
SR500-s Course Notes
5-112 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
Technical Training Documentation Addemdum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\REPEATER.SAM 5-112-1
Addemdum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-112-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\REPEATER.SAM
Technical Training Documentation Addemdum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\REPEATER.SAM 5-112-3
Addemdum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-112-4 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\REPEATER.SAM

OS
CONTROLLER
&
REPEATER
CONTROLLER
INBOUND
TRANSCEIVER
OUTBOUND
TRANSCEIVER
OS/RMO
LINE/DATA
MODULE(S)
OUTBOUND
RX CLOCK & DATA
INBOUND
TX CLOCK, DATA, &
BURST CONTROL
OUTBOUND
TX CLOCK & DATA
INBOUND
RX CLOCK, DATA, &
CARRIER DETECT
TX PCM &
M-LEAD
RX PCM &
E-LEAD
LTB
SR500 OUTSTATION REPEATER
Simplified Block Diagram of an SR500 Drop Repeater SBDOR.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-113
SR500-s Course Notes
5-114 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM Repeater
Power Supply
Note:
Other power supplies with different input voltage (i.e. 13.6 VDC only,
-48VDC) are available.

SLIM Power Supply (e.g. 513305) - Front View
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DC INPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
+5.1 V 2%
-5.0 V 5%
+12 V 5%
-12 V 5%
+25 V 10%
-48 V 10%
0/5 V square wave;
same frequency as the ring generator.
Only when RING ENABLE is active.
10.5 to 17 VDC
DC Switch
Test Points
REPPSFV.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-115
SLIM Power Supply (e.g. SD513305) - Simplified block diagram
Input voltage monitoring
Inactive if V < 10.5 Volts +/- 0.3V
Reset if V > 12 Volts
Inactive if V > 18.0 Volts +/- 1.0V
External Battery
+ 13.6 VDC nom.
Ring Enable
Sine wave
frequency
generator
adjusted by
R23,R25
(ring freq.)
15Hz to 50 Hz
and DC offset
+5.1 Volts 2.3 Amp.
-5 Volts 1.4 Amp.
+12 Volts 3.4 Amp.
-12 Volts 300 mA
DC/DC Switching
Converter
switching freq. 100kHz
Input : 12VDC
Outputs :
+/- 5 Volts
+/- 12 Volts
+25 Volts
- 48 Volts
Protection,
and Output Filters
+25 Volts 2.0 A.
90 Vrms. 110 mA.
DC/AC Converter
90 Vrms.
Current Limiter
Shunt Regulator
T
R
A
N
S
C
E
I
V
E
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
A
N
D
L
I
N
E
S
H
E
L
F
SLMREPPS.DS4
-48 Volts 0.45 Amp.
DC
Fuse
20A
Ring Sync
e.g. SD513305
DC
Switch
Ring Overload
JP5
User Defined External Alarm #4 Open Crcuit
Closed Circuit
Detector
(isolated by
opto-couplers)
options:
Norm. Open (NO)
Norm. Closed (NC)
using JP1 to JP4
JP6
User Defined External Alarm #3
User Defined External Alarm #2
User Defined External Alarm #1
Early Warning PF
External Shutdown
OR
BATTVS+
BATTVS-
EMI
Filter
Input
Transient
Suppressor
Reverse
Polarity
Protection
DC INPUT TP
PS Fail
AC Fail
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
1
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
1
7
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
1
8
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
SLIM
POWER
SUPPLY
GND
DC INPUT
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+25V
-48V
RING. CLK
The cover of the SLIM power
supply is held in place by six
screws.
05-16EA.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-119
Set t ing t he Ext ernal Alarm Jumpers
1. With reference to the table below and the illustration on the adjacent
page, set jumpers 1 to 6. Note that:
a. Asterisks identify default settings.
b. Alarm 2 is reserved for reporting an open-door alarm when the
optional open-door sensor is equipped.
c. For alarm 3 to report a PS Fail alarm, JP3 and JP5 must be set to
their default settings.
Jumper (Alarm) Jumper Position
JP1 (Alarm 1) NO* NC
JP2 (Alarm 2) NO* NC
JP3 (Alarm 3) NO NC*
JP4 (Alarm 4) NO NC*
Alarm 3 Assignment
JP 5 (PS Fail) AL3 PSF*
Alarm 4 Assignement
JP 6 (AC Fail) AL4 ACF*

2. Replace the power supply's cover and secure with screws.
3. Replace the Power supply in the SLIM station.

SR500-s Course Notes
5-120 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-121
SR500-s Course Notes
5-122 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM 2. 4GHz
Inbound Transceiver
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
Inbound Transceiver - Front View
SLIMFV.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-123
SLIM Inbound Transceiver (2.4GHz) - Simplified Block Diagram
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, +25VDC
MODULAT.
I
Q
DEMODULATOR
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
LNA and
FILTER
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
XMT MODULE
RCV MODULE
-1.2 dB loss
-1.7 dB loss
RCV ALARM
NOTES:
DEPENDING ON PA OPTION
A PA IS MOUNTED ON THE
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR
GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS
REQUESTED.
SLIMINB.DS4
2
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
FREQUENCY
(PLL) CONTROL
RCV
FILTER
XMT
FILTER
BURST CONTROL
XMT POWER:
4W ( +35 dBm)
1W ( +30 dBm)
0.1W ( +20 dBm)
RCV POWER:
-92dBm < P rx <-45 dBm
INTERCONN.
LO/MOD
BURST CONTROL
RCV
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
PA
+28 dB gain
(2.5-2.7 GHz)
XMT
RF OUT
RCV
RF IN
1
1
LO MON
(SMA)
IB RX ALARM
RF SENSE
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
RCV
FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
(freq. conversion)
VCO
3
FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY
SENSITIVE
I
Q
3
3
LOW
POWER
AMPLIFIER
.1W (+20dBm)
IB RX OE
I Q STR
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
BUFFER
50 sec. or
130 sec.
CIRCULATOR
-0.4 dB loss
OQPSK
+23 dBm
Rx Freq.
-10 dBm
OQPSK
-56 dBm
to
-19 dBm
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
NC ALARM
ND ALARM (Outbound only)
LO OUT
SMA
LO IN
GND
+-
PA
2
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
+-
Tx Freq.
0 dBm
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
2
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
Module 513390 ("XMT Baseband processor")
DATA
DATA
Jumper Use Position
Module 513325 (synthesizer)
Module 513345 (interconnect)
Module 513410 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 512450 (power amplifier 20 dBm)
(The transmitter is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects burst mode transmission ( for normal operation)
Selects continuous mode transmission ( for testing purpose)
JP2
Selects if transmit data is normal (usual position)
JP8
Selects if transmit frequency > receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit frequency < receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit data is inverted
JP5
Enable the TX clock signal (normal operation)
Open the TX clock path ( for testing purpose)
A
B
Inserted
Removed
TX > RX
TX < RX
JP3,4
JP6,7
Used for factory testing
Inserted
SLIMTXOP.DS4 Option Table for SLIM Transmitter #513330 (2.4 GHz)
Set the frequency to the transmit frequency
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
2
5
Module 513350 ("RCV processor IB")
Jumper Use Position
Module 512091 (BB amplifier filter)
Module 513410 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 513500 (buffer)
Module 513320 (frequency converter)
(The receiver is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects if receive data is normal D
SLIMTXO2.DS4 Option Table for SLIM Inbound Receiver #513335 (2.4 GHz)
Selects if receive data is inverted D
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
2
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
F
.
S
A
M
Tx Rx
SYNTHESIZED
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
Transmitter
First digit of
transmit
frequency
is permanently
set to either
1 or 2
2 3 1 6 0 0
JP8
JP8
Tx > Rx FREQ.
Tx < Rx FREQ.
SLIM Inbound Transceiver- Frequency Setting
FIG08.DS4
Frequency
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8 9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8 9
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8
9
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Note:
The 1.5 GHz and other
transceivers have only
4 switches. For the
1.5 GHz, the last one is
for the MHz fraction as
per this table:
0 =0.00
2 =0.25
5 =0.50
7 =0.75
Frequency
0

1
2 3

4

5

6

7
8 9
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-127
Transmitter
JP2
DATA
DATA
DATA
JP2
DATA
JP3
JP4
J
P
1
TX>RX
TX<RX
JP8
J
P
5
J
P
8
B
A
INBOUND ONLY
Inbound Receiver
SLIM Inbound Transceivers - Option Settings
(e.g. 513390 iss.002)
(e.g. 513350 iss.005)
FIG08D.DS4
JP1
D D
JP1
D D
SR500-s Course Notes
5-128 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM Inbound 2.4 GHz Transceiver (PA/Duplexer not shown) - Front View
Tx
Rx
FIGTRFV.DS4
RCV IN
L.O. MON
Rx ALARM LED
L.O. IN
L.O. OUT
XMT OUT
XMT ALARM LED
(From PA/Duplexer)
(To PA/Duplexer)
TPx (Future use)
TP3 Q
TP2 I
TP1 STR
TP4 GND
TP3 RF sense
TP2 NC alarm
TP1 ND alarm
(outbound only)
RF sense: 5V when it senses that the out put power is within
5 db of the nominal out put power; 0V otherwise.
No Clock (NC), No Data (ND) alarms:
(ND is for the outbound transceiver only)
5 V in alarmcondition
0 V in normal condition
(Rx Freq. approx. -10 dBm)
(Tx Freq. approx. 0 dBm)
On the transmitter:
On the receiver:
On the 513350 baseband processor, test points are I, Q and STR as shown on the next page.
On the 513351baseband processor, test points are PLL, VCXO,Q, I, AGC and RSS. Most test points
are for factory testing.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-129
STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock) STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock) STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock) STR (Symbol Timing Recovery: recovered 2.432 MHz clock)
I Signal I Signal I Signal I Signal
5V 5V 5V 5V
Time Time Time Time
Time Time Time Time
Eye Pattern - Demonstration at the Inbound Transceiver
Notes:
1) When I is in the center of the bit, Q is at the symbol start/end (e.g. at a transition).
2) To display I or Q signals or both on an oscilloscope, it is easier to use STR
as an external trigger and a sweep rate of 0.2 microsec. per division.
EYE.DS4
Time Time Time Time
Q Signal Q Signal Q Signal Q Signal
SR500-s Course Notes
5-130 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM Repeater
Outbound Transceiver
Receiver
Transmitter
PA/Duplexer
SLIMRFV.DS4
Outbound Transceiver - Front View
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM 5-131
OUTBTRFV.DS4
Outbound Transceiver (PA/Duplexer not shown) - Front View
Tx Rx
XMT OUT
(to P/A Duplexer Module)
L.O. MON
L.O. MON
RCV IN
fromP/A Duplexer
Module
XMT ALARM LED
DC TEST POINTS
DETECTED BURST (DETB)
SYMBOL TIMING RECOVERY (STR)
CARRIER DETECT CLEAR (CDC)
Rx SIGNAL STRENGHT INDICATOR (RSSI)
IN PHASE COMPONENT (I)
QUADRATURE COMPONENT (Q)
ANALOG CARRIER DETECT (ANCD)
RF sense: 5V when it senses that the out put power is within
5 db of the nominal out put power; 0V otherwise.
No Clock (NC), No Data (ND) alarms: 5 V in alarm condition
0 V in normal condition
On the transmitter:
Rx freq. 70MHz

approx. -10 dBm
(Tx freq. approx. 0 dBm)
SR500-s Course Notes
5-132 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05F.SAM
SLIM Outbound Transceiver - Simplified Block Diagram
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, +25VDC
MODULAT.
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
PA
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
.1W (+20dB)
XMT MODULE
RCV MODULE
-1.2 dB loss
XMT ALARM
NOTES: NOTES: NOTES: NOTES:
DEPENDING ON PA OPTION DEPENDING ON PA OPTION DEPENDING ON PA OPTION DEPENDING ON PA OPTION
SLIMOUTB.DS4
2
LOW
POWER
AMPLIFIER
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
RCV
FILTER
XMT
FILTER
BURST CONTROL
XMT POWER:
4W (35 dBm)
1W (30 dBm)
0.1W (20 dBm)
RCV POWER:
-92dBm <Prx<-45 dBm
2
INTERCONN.
LO/MOD
TX ENABLE
(BURST CONTROL)
PA
RCV
RF IN
1
1
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
RCV
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
3
FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY FILTERS ARE FREQUENCY
SENSITIVE SENSITIVE SENSITIVE SENSITIVE
3
3
INTERCONN.
LO/LNC
LO OUT
(SMA)
DEMODULATOR
LNC
CD CLEAR
ANALOG CD
RSSI
A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE A PA IS MOUNTEDON THE
PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE PA AND DUPLEXER MODULE
ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR
GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS GREATER THAN 20 dBmIS
REQUESTED. REQUESTED. REQUESTED. REQUESTED.
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
5V = active TX
0V = standby
NC ALARM
OQPSK IF
70 MHz
-43dBm
+4 dBm
-1.2 dB loss
CIRCULATOR
-0.4 dB loss
OQPSK
+23 dBm
XMT
RF OUT
OQPSK
-93.5 dBm
to
-46.5 dBm
TxFreq.
0 dBm
LO MON (SMA)
Rxfreq. 70 MHz
-10 dbm
5 V
0 V
5 V
0 V
5 V
0 V
5 V
0 V
ND ALARM (OB ONLY)
RF SENSE
DET
BURST I Q STR
+-
+-
LNA
DOWN
CONV.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
3
3
Module 513390 ("XMT Baseband processor")
DATA
DATA
Jumper Use Position
Module 513325 (synthesizer)
Module 513345 (interconnect)
Module 513410 (modulator/demodulator)
Module 512450 (power amplifier 20 dBm)
(The transmitter is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP1
Selects burst mode transmission ( for normal operation)
Selects continuous mode transmission ( for testing purpose)
JP2
Selects if transmit data is normal (usual position)
JP8
Selects if transmit frequency > receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit frequency < receive frequency (Inbound transceiver only)
Selects if transmit data is inverted
JP5
Enable the TX clock signal (normal operation)
Open the TX clock path ( for testing purpose)
A
B
Inserted
Removed
TX > RX
TX < RX
JP3,4
JP6,7
Used for factory testing
Inserted
SLIMTXOP.DS4 Option Table for SLIM Transmitter #513330 (2.4 GHz)
Set the frequency to the transmit frequency
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
3
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
D
Jumper Use Position
Module 513225 (interconnect)
Module 513220 (LNC)
Module 513325 (synthesizer)
(The receiver is an assembly of several modules; the above modules are used at the training center. For other modules, see the Assembly Options Manual.
No jumper set by the user.
JP4 or
JP9
Selects if receive data is normal
Selects if receive data is inverted
Issue: preliminary
SLMORXOP.DS4
D
Module 513215 (OB demodulator)
TX < RX
JP5 or
JP10
Selects if the transmit frequency < receive frequency (Outbound transceiver only)
Selects if the transmit frequency > receive frequency (Outbound transceiver only)
TX > RX
Others
Used for factory testing
Note: The synthesizer frequency must be offset by 70MHz fromthe receive frequency
and away from the transmitter frequency. If Tx <Rx, set the synthesizer to Rx frequency +70 MHz.
If Tx >Rx, set the synthesizer to the Rx frequency -70 MHz.
Option Table for SLIM Outbound Receiver #513230 (2.4 GHz)
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
3
5
SYNTHESIZED
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
Transmitter or Receiver
First digit of
transmit
frequency
is permanently
set to either
1 or 2
2 3 0 6 0 0
JP8
SLIM Outbound Transceiver - Frequency Setting
FIG08E.DS4
Note:
The 1.5 GHz and other
transceivers have only
4 switches. For the
1.5 GHz, the last one is
for the MHz fraction as
per this table: 0 =0.00
2 =0.25
5 =0.50
7 =0.75
Tx Rx
Frequency
Frequency
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0

1

2
3 4

5

6

7

8
9
0 1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9
SR500-s Course Notes
5-136 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-NSEC05G.SAM
TRANSMITTER
JP2
DATA
DATA
DATA
JP2
DATA
SLIM Outbound Transceivers - Option Settings
FIG08B.DS4
JP3
JP4
JP
1
OUTBOUND RECEIVER
DATA
DATA
TX>RX
TX<RX
JP8
J
P
5
J
P
8
TX>RX RX>TX
RSSI ADJ
B
A
INBOUND ONLY
OUTBOUND ONLY
Data Polarity
Sideband Select
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05G.SAM 5-137
CDC (time slot timing fromthe controller; rising edges indicate beginning/end of time slots)
ANALOG CD (RXIF envelope)
DET. BURST (burst detection)
5V
5V
T1 T1 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T4 T4 T5 T5 T5 T5 T6 T6 T6 T6 T7 T7 T7 T7
M MM M
B BB B
0 00 0
M MM M
B BB B
1 11 1
Saturation Saturation Saturation Saturation
Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Noise level Noise level Noise level Noise level
aprox.
3-4V
Time Time Time Time
Time Time Time Time
Time Time Time Time
Time Division Multiplexing - Demonstration at the Outbound Transceiver
Notes:
At the Central Station the test point RXFRM (on the CS Timing Module) is used as an external
trigger for the oscilloscope. At a repeater site, TP1on the SLIM controller 513261, TP2 on the
SLIM controller 513260 or TP3 on the RMO/RMR controller may be used as an external trigger.
The last trunks (i.e. T55 to T60, which are more often used) may be monitored
by using the oscilloscope's delayed trigger feature.
MB0 and MB1and Sub-Multiplexed Data Trunks will be flashing (detected and undetected)
depending on their occurrence (a trace will be seen at the top and bottomof the signal).
ANCD2.DS4
(1) (1)
(1) (1)
(1) 50 s (2) 130 s
(2)
(2)
SR500-s Course Notes
5-138 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-NSEC05G.SAM
SLI M Cont rol l er
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. 513260) - Front View
Station Address Decade Switches
Receive Synchronization (red) LED
Autotime (red) LED
Alarm (red) LED
Transmit Burst Enable (yellow) LED
Optional 2-Wire VF or Orderwire
Optional 2-Wire VF or Prepay(12 or 16 kHz)
FIGCOFV3.DS4
x 100
x 10
x 1
The controller SD513261is similar but the first line can be
an order wire, a 2-wire VF or a prepay (12 or 16 KHz) line.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05G.SAM 5-139
SLIM Controller Module (e.g. SD513260) - Simplified Block Diagram
TX signalling(M)
Memory
RX signalling(E)
Memory
TX PCM Memory
64 PCM samples/trunk
MUX
DEMUX
MB0/MB1
TX memory
MB0/MB1
RX memory
MUX
Scrambler
DEMUX
(UW Detector)
Descrambler
RX PCM Memory
32 PCM samples/trunk
DATA
CLOCK
(PLL1)
614.4 KhZ
DTCLK
(PLL2)
96 Khz
or 112 kHz
EPROM
128K x 16
80C186
CPU
25 MHz
clock
Xtal
(CPU)
RAM
128K x 16
+
NVRAM
128K x 16
Maint.
&
Diag.
Mode
x100
x10
x1
DB-9
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
BURST CTRL
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
ring
relay
control
polarity
relay
control
off/on hook
dial pulses
detector
off hook
during ring
detector
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
VF T S D
ring
relay
control
polarity
relay
control
LOOP
ASIC
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL
TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL
SLIMCON3.DS4
EXT.
User
Alarms
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
DATA BUS,
ADDRESS BUS,
WR, RD, LCE
1/2
DSLAC
TXINT
TXTONE
RXINT
RXTONE
Dip Sw.
and
Config.
Switches
To theline tester
1/2
DSLAC
RJ
12
Line
Tester
and
Battery
Tester
SUPER ASIC
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
TXINT
TXTONE
RXINT
RXTONE
DSLAC
and
DTMF
decoders
Tone Bank
12/16
kHz
gen.
det.
I CC
CLOCKS FOR
DSLAC, etc.
Digital
Combiner
Digital
Splitter
AUX.
balanced
drivers
AUX.
balanced
detectors
8.192
MHz
Xtal
(DSLAC)
3.579
MHz
Xtal
(DTMF
decoders)
Fromtheauxiliary
via balanced detectors
To/fromtheauxiliary
via balanced
drivers and detectors.
Intracall
Interface
To/fromtheauxiliary
BUFFER FOR LINE SHELF
To theauxiliary
via balanced drivers
RJ
12
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, -12VDC
-48VDC
RING VOLT. RING CLOCK
off hook
during ring
detector
off/on hook
dial pulses
detector
9.728
MHz
Xtal
(OPT)
TXDAT
RXDAT
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
LEDS
Station
Address
Switches
4
/
11
/
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
4
0
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
4
1
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
4
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
4
3
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
4
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
4
5
SLIM
Controller
COARSE DELAY
DISTANCE
INTERVALS
SLIM
CONTROLLER
SETTING
(km)
5 4 3
000 - 084
080 - 174
160 - 264
240 - 354
320 - 444
400 - 534
480 - 624
560 - 714
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
12345678
SLIM Outstation Controller - Coarse Delay Setting
FIG09.DS4
SW 4
For SW4 - 1,2,6,7,8
meaning, see the
option table
SR500-s Course Notes
5-146 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-NSEC05G.SAM
Repeater Controller
Repeater Controller Module (e.g.SD 512267)
512267.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05G.SAM 5-147
SR 500 Repeater Controller (e.g. 512267) Simplified Block Diagram
REPCONT.DS4
TX FILTER
RX FILTER
PA
INBOUND
TRANSMITTER
INBOUND
RECEIVER
SRT OSCAR
EPROM
X2
Mode
DIP
SW
TX
BAL.
DRIV.
RX
BAL.
DET.
RPOSDAT
RPOS CLK
OSRPDAT
RPCSDAT
RPCSCLK
RPCSBUR
INBRXDAT
INBRXCLK
TX FILTER
RX FILTER
PA
OUTBOUND
TRANSMITTER
OUTBOUND
RECEIVER
MB0/MB1
TX MEMORY
MB0/MB1
RX MEMORY
MUX
SCRAMBLER
DE-SCRAMBLER
DEMUX
(UW DETECTOR)
SRT ASIC
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
BURST CTRL
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
MB0/MB1
TX MEMORY
MB0/MB1
RX MEMORY
MUX
SCRAMBLER
DE-SCAMBLER
DEMUX
(UW DETECTER)
SRT ASIC
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
BURST CTRL
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
CD
CDC
RPOSTXE
OSRPCLK
TX
BAL.
DRIV.
RX
BAL.
DET.
REPEATER CONTROLLER
SLIM CONTROLLER IN
THE MASTER OUTSTATION
POWER
LEVEL
MEASURE
A/D
BER
COMPARATORS
AND COUNTERS
INTER-CPU
COMMUNIC.
AND
ARBITRATOR
BURST
TEMPLATE
CPU
CD
AND
UW
LOGGING
ALARMS
RSSI
TCLEN
SLIM CONTROLLER IN
THE AUXILIARY OUTSTATION
INTERFACE INTERFACE
RX
BAL.
DET.
TX
BAL.
DRIV.
To the standby
OS controller
To the BER
comparators
and counters
From
the OS
controller
See the assembly option manual
for the DIP switch settings
B-TEMP
RAM
ALARMS
ALARMS
BURST
VALIDATION:
BUFFER
UW
DETECTOR
PREAMBLE
GENERATION
DIGITAL
COMBINER
DIGITAL
SPLITTER
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
4
8
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
SEE TABLE 1
SEE TABLE 2
SEE TABLE 3
SEE TABLE 5
SEE TABLE 4
OPTION TABLES FOR:
REPEATER CONTROLLER MODULE #
512267-X X X X X X
SEE TABLE 6
1
0
4
HOT STANDBY CABINET
1
0
#
TABLE 3
COLD STANDBY CABINET
TABLE 2
#
0
1 1
0
#
TABLE 1
RPTR
2
1
0
3
MAIN CABINET
REDUNDANT
CABINET
2 0 0
1
1
BASIC RPTR.
(PHASE 0 FUNCTIONALITY)
ENHANCED RPTR. FUNTIONALITY &
COMPATIBILITY WITH C/S CQT 510700
2
ENHANCED RPTR. FUNCTIONALITY &
COMPATIBILITY WITH C/S CQT 512360
1 1
5
0
0
1
6
0
0
1 JP2
1 CSTBY
HSTBY 0
RMR
SW1
SW1 SW1
AND ALL RMR'S
I/B REDUNDANCY
I/B & O/B
FULL REDUNDANCY
TABLE 4
2
1
#
0
1
0
1
1
SW1
1
7
0
8
REDUNDANCY
FUTURE USE 0 0 FUTURE USE
PC LOAD
PROM LOAD
1
#
0
PC
PROM
JP1 DOWNLOAD MODE
TABLE 5 TABLE 6
(NORMAL POSITION)
Repeater Controller Module (e.g. SD512267) - Option Tables
512267OP.DRW
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
4
9
Repeater Controller Module (e.g.SD 512267)
512267.DS4
SR500-s Course Notes
5-150 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-NSEC05G.SAM
High Capacity
Outstation Operation
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-1
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
High Capacity
Outstati ons
The High Capacity outstation is similar to the standard SLIM outstations
except that they carry a much larger number of 2-wire subscribers. An
Auxiliary outstation 50 or 100 can also be used with an existing SLIM
outstation to increase its capacity by adding over 50 or 100 2-wire
subscribers to the present installation
Remote
Stations
Subscriber Line Capacities
2-wire
POTS or
SPP*
MSM Telex 4-wire
E&M
Data
Outstation
HCO 50 58** 58** 1 4 4
HCO 100 102** 102** 1 4 4
Auxiliary Outstations
AUX. 50 58** 58** 1 4 4
AUX. 100 102** 102** 1 4 4
Subscriber Line Capacities
* SPP =semi-postpay
** Including the two lines on the controller
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-3
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-4 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-5
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-6 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-7
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-8 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
The assemblies of the HC remote station are housed in a weatherproof
aluminium cabinet that is suitable for outdoor or indoor installation. The
ambient operating temperature of the HC remote station is from -30 to
+55C. If the HC remote station is exposed to continuous direct sunlight,
especially in a hot climate, optional sunshades are available to prevent the
equipment from overheating.
Each HC remote station comes with a mounting bracket that enables it to be
installed on any vertical surface which may be a tower, pole or wall.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-9
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-10 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
HCO Power Supply
Not e:
Several versions of power supplies with different input voltage are available.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-11
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-12 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
H
C
O
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
5
0
-
1
3
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
5
0
-
1
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
H
C
O
.
S
A
M
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-15
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
5
0
-
1
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
H
C
O
.
S
A
M
High Capacity
Repeater 24
Not e:
The HC repeater 24 extends the line-of-sight between the central station and
the outstations. The repeater 24 can provide service for 26 subscribers and
for higher subscriber population, a SLIM auxiliary 34 outstation or an HC
auxiliary outstation can be connected to the repeater.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-17
Line Int erf ace Slot s
The HC repeater 24 has six slots for holding line interface modules: four
slots can hold only 2-wire, MSM or ISDN modules and two universal slots
can accommodate any type of voice or data interface module.
Power supply
The HC repeater 24 can operate off a -48 VDC power source only. At sites
where only AC is available, the power pack with the AC to -48 VDC
converter must be ordered.
St andby Prot ect ion
Standby protection option is available for HC repeater 24. Standby
protection is achieved with the following:
Second inbound transceiver
Second outbound transceiver
Second power supply
Import ant Not es on HC Repeat er 24
The HC repeater 24 always requires a switching card.
Protected or unprotected outbound-ready configuration is
possible.
Outbound ready configuration is not possible when NEM is
equipped.
Unprotected and protected configurations are possible.
A power supply is required for every transceivers set.
One or two power packs can power a HC repeater 24.
Cabinets which have original number (201-515100-001) will not
support the 10.5 GHz radio. The revised backplane supporting
10.5 GHz will have the number (201-515101-001).
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-18 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM 5-150-19
OS
CONTROLLER
&
REPEATER
CONTROLLER
INBOUND
TRANSCEIVER
OUTBOUND
TRANSCEIVER
LINE/DATA
MODULE(S)
OUTBOUND
RX CLOCK & DATA
INBOUND
TX CLOCK, DATA, &
BURST CONTROL
OUTBOUND
TX CLOCK & DATA
INBOUND
RX CLOCK, DATA, &
CARRIER DETECT
TX PCM &
M-LEAD
RX PCM &
E-LEAD
LTB
SR500 OUTSTATION REPEATER
Simplified Block Diagram of a Drop Repeater
SBDOR.DS4
24
To/From
CS
To/From
RS
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-150-20 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\HCO.SAM
SR 500 HC Repeater Controller (e.g. 514950) Simplified Block Diagram
HCREPCO.DS4
TX FILTER
RX FILTER
PA
INBOUND
TRANSMITTER
MAIN TRANCEIVER
Mode
DIP
SW
RPOSDAT
RPOSCLK
OSRPDAT
RPCSDAT
RPCSCLK
RPCSBUR
INBRXDAT
INBRXCLK
TX FILTER
RX FILTER
PA
OUTBOUND
TRANSMITTER
OUTBOUND
RECEIVER
MB0/MB1
TX MEMORY
MB0/MB1
RX MEMORY
MUX
SCRAMBLER
DE-SCAMBLER
DEMUX
(UW DETECTOR)
SRT ASIC
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
OBCD
RPOSTXE
OSRPCLK
REPEATER CONTROLLER
OUTSTATION CONTROLLER
BER
COMPARATORS
AND COUNTERS
OBCDC
RSSI
TCLEN
TotheBER
comparators
and counters
From
the OS
controller
TX FILTER
RX FILTER
PA
INBOUND
TRANSMITTER
INBOUND
RECEIVER
STANDBY TRANCEIVER
MAIN TRANCEIVER
TX FILTER
RX FILTER
PA
OUTBOUND
TRANSMITTER
OUTBOUND
RECEIVER
STANDBY TRANCEIVER
STANDBY
INBOUND
ALARMS
INBOUND
RECEIVER
ARBITRATOR
BURST
TEMPLATE
CD AND UW
LOGGING
RAM
INTERFACE CPU INTERFACE
OBALMS
R_OBALMS
R_IBALMS
M
U
X
RSSI
BURST
VALIDATION:
BUFFER
UW
DETECTOR
PREAMBLE
GENERATION
POWER
LEVEL
MEASURE
A/D
OBALMS
OSRPCLK
OSRPDAT
OBCD
RPOSTXE
RPOSCLK
RPOSDAT
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
BURST CTRL
IB ALARMS
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
RPCSDAT
RFSWE
INBRXDAT
INBRXCLK
IBALMS
RPCSBUR
RPCSDAT
RPCSCLK
OBALMS
RFSWE
OBCDC
ALARMS
LED (red)*
* LED is on when the standby tranceivers are
working instead of the main transceiver.
DIGITAL
COMBINER
DIGITAL
SPLITTER
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
H
C
O
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
5
0
-
2
1
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
5
0
-
2
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
H
C
O
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
H
C
O
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
5
0
-
2
3
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
5
0
-
2
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
H
C
O
.
S
A
M
TS-4
Terminal Station
Not e:
For more information, please refer to the TS-4 Installation Guide
033-100285-001.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\TS4.SAM 5-150-25
Addendum to the SR500s Course Notes
5-150-26 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\TS4.SAM
Line Terminal
Box Connections
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05G.SAM 5-151
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
5
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
S
E
C
0
5
G
.
S
A
M
10- LI NE VF ONLY
2-Wire VF, 4-Wire E&M VF and Telex Connections.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1
CTRL POS. 1 POS. 2
A a A b B a B b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b 2 W
a b a b NT
T a T b R a R b T a T b R a R b PT
POS. 1 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 1 (CIRCUIT B) POS. 2 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 2 (CIRCUIT B)
a b a1 b1 a b a1 b1 a b a1 b1 a b a1 b1 4 W
2
POS. 1 POS. 2 EXTERNAL ALARMS
CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B 1 2 3 4
ELD MLD ELD MLD ELD MLD ELD MLD 4 W + - + - + - + -
LEGEND:
CTRL or POS. #
A, B, C or D
TP
RN
TP1
RN1
ELD
MLD
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Plug-in position in SLIM cabinet.
Circuit on interface module or SLIM controller.
Tip (a)
Ring (b)
Tip 1 (a1)
Ring 1 (b1)
E lead
M lead
2W
4W
NT
PT
T TP
T RN
R TP
R RN
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
2-wire VF connections
4-wire E&M VF connections
Neutral telex connections
Polar telex connections
Transmit Tip (a)
Transmit Ring (a)
Receive Tip (a)
Receive Ring (b)
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05G.SAM 5-153
10- LI NE VF/ DATA
Only 2-wire VF and RS-422A/V.11 data connections are shown. For other
connections, see the LTB Wiring Guide.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1
CTRL POS. 1 POS. 2
A a A b B a B b
A a
A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b
2W
POS. 1 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 2 (CIRCUIT A)
TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS V.11
2
POS. 1 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 2 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 1 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 2 (CIRCUIT A)
TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND V.11
3
POS. 1 (CIRCUIT B)
TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND V.11
4
POS. 2 (CIRCUIT B)
TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND V.11
5
EXTERNAL ALARMS
1 2 3 4
+ - + - + - + -
LEGEND:
CTRL or POS. #
A, B, C or D
TP
RN
TXD
RXD
TXC
TMC
RXC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Plug-in position in SLIM cabinet.
Circuit on interface module or SLIM controller
Tip (a)
Ring (b)
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Transmitter Signal Element Timing (DTE Source)
Transmitter Signal Element Timing (DCE Source)
Receiver Signal Element Timing
RTS
CTS
DSR
DTR
RSD
RI
SQ
GND
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Data Terminal Ready
Receive Line Signal Detector
Ring Indicator
Signal Quality Detector
Ground
SR500-s Course Notes
5-154 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-NSEC05G.SAM
34- LI NE VF ONLY
2-Wire VF, 4-Wire E&M VF and Telex Connections.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1
CTRL POS. 1 POS. 2
2W A a A b B a B b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b
NT a b a b
PT T a T b R a R b T a T b R a R b
4W A a A b A a1 A b1 B a B b B a1 B b1 A a A b A a1 A b1 B a B b B a1 B b1
2
POS. 3 POS. 4 POS. 5
2W A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b
NT a b a b a b
PT T a T b R a R b T a T b R a R b T a T b R a R b
4W A a A b A a1 A b1 B a B b B a1 B b1 A a A b A a1 A b1 B a B b B a1 B b1 A a A b A a1 A b1
3
POS. 5 POS. 6 POS. 7
2W C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b
NT a b a b
PT T a T b R a R b T a T b R a R b
4W B a B b B a1 B b1 A a A b A a1 A b1 B a B b B a1 B b1 A a A b A a1 A b1 B a B b B a1 B b1
4
POS. 8 POS. 1 POS. 2 POS. 3
2W A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b
NT a b
PT T a
T b
R a R b
4W A a A b A a1 A b1 B a B b B a1 B b1 A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD
5
POS. 4 POS. 5 POS. 6 POS. 7 POS. 8
4W A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD A ELD A MLD B ELD B MLD
6
EXTERNAL ALARMS
1 2 3 4
+ - + - + - + -
*Note: SLIM auxiliary 34 outstation do not support external alarms.
LEGEND:
CTRL or POS. #
A, B, C or D
2W
NT
PT
4W
=
=
=
=
=
=
Position of the SLIM Controller Module.
Circuit on interface module or SLIM controller
2-Wire
Neutral Telex
Polar Telex
4-Wire E&M
a
b
a1
b1
ELD
MLD
=
=
=
=
=
=
a-wire (Tip). For 4-wire E&M, this designation is for the
transmit direction.
b-wire (Ring). For 4-wire E&M, this designation is for
the transmit direction
a1-wire (Tip 1). Receive direction for 4-wire E&M.
b1-wire (Ring). Receive direction for 4-wire E&M.
E lead
M lead
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05G.SAM 5-155
34- LI NE VF/ DATA
Only 2-wire VF and RS-422A/V.11 data connections are shown. For other
connections or for an explanation of abbreviations, see the LTB Wiring
Guide.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1
CTRL POS. 1 POS. 2
A a A b B a B b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b 2W
2
POS. 3 POS. 4 POS. 5 (CIRCUIT A)
A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b 2W
TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- V.11
3
POS. 5 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 6 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 7 (CIRCUIT A)
C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b 2W
RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS V.11
4
POS. 8 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 1 POS. 2 POS. 3
A a A b B a B b C a C b D a D b 2W
TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS V.11
5
POS. 4 POS. 5 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 6 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 7 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 8 (CIRCUIT A)
TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR V.11
6
POS. 5 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 6 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 7 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 8 (A)
RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND RSD SQ V.11
7
POS. 8 (CIRCUIT A) POS. 5 (CIRCUIT B)
TMC+ TMC- RI GND TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- V.11
8
POS. 5 (B) POS. 6 (CIRCUIT B)
RI GND TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND V.11
9
POS. 7 (CIRCUIT B)
TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS
CTS
TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND V.11
10
POS. 8 (CIRCUIT B)
TXD+ TXD- RXD+ RXD- RXC+ RXC- RTS CTS TXC+ TXC- DSR DTR RSD SQ TMC+ TMC- RI GND V.11
11
EXTERNAL ALARMS*
1 2 3 4
+ - + - + - + -
*Note: SLIM auxiliary 34 outstations do not support externals alarms.
LEGEND:
CTRL or POS. #
A, B, C or D
TP
RN
TXD
RXD
TXC
TMC
RXC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Plug-in position in SLIM cabinet.
Circuit on interface module or SLIM controller
Tip (a)
Ring (b)
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Transmitter Signal Element Timing (DTE Source)
Transmitter Signal Element Timing (DCE Source)
Receiver Signal Element Timing
RTS
CTS
DSR
DTR
RSD
RI
SQ
GND
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Data Terminal Ready
Receive Line Signal
Detector
Ring Indicator
Signal Quality Detector
Ground
SR500-s Course Notes
5-156 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-NSEC05G.SAM
Rack Mounted
Outstation (RMO)
Operation
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-157
RMO Overvi ew

** Used only for the rack mounted repeater *1 RMU (Rack Mounting Unit) = 1.75 inch approx.
RMU Dimensions of a Rack Mounted Station
SR500-s Course Notes
5-158 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM


Rack Enclosure
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-159
Modular Break Down Of An RMO
SR500-s Course Notes
5-160 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM
RMO Modul ar Power Syst em (MPS)
The modular power system comprises a shelf that holds the power supplies
needed to energise the equipment of a central station (C.S.), rack-mounted
outstation (RMO) or rack-mounted repeater (RMR).
The modular power system can operate from any of the following power
sources:
Option Range
-24 VDC -20 to -36 VDC
-48 VDC -36 to -72 VDC
See FM5-010220-E "SR500-s Rack Mounted Remote Stations Field Service
Manual" for description, installation and troubleshooting guide.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-161
SR500-s Modular Power System
SR500-s Course Notes
5-162 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM
Back Panel Connectors
SOURCE 2
GND GND
SOURCE 1
INTERRACK
BUFFER
J19 J20
J
1
3
J
1
8
L1
TCL2
J21
TCL1
J22
5V
REM SENSE
J23
C1
AC2
J36
AC1
J37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
J24 J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31
J32 J33 J34 J35
J38 J39 J40 J41
J42
J44
CUSTOMER
ALARMS
J43
P/S FAIL
ALARM
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
TB & RNG
MODULAR POWER SYSTEM
1 1
L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S
TX - RX
1 1 1 1
1
MPS-02.DS4
Barrier Strips (J13 & J18) - connect up to two DC power sources to the
modular power system. Both power sources must deliver identical output
voltages, either -24 or -48 VDC. J13 and J18 also serve to connect the
optional external battery pack(s).
Interrack Buffer Outputs (J19 & J20) - deliver power to the interrack
buffer shelves on the central station. Connector J19 delivers power to the
shelf on the auxiliary central station rack and J20 to the shelf on the main
central station rack.
TCL1 (J22) & TCL2 (J21) - deliver power to the plug-in modules of the
station's control shelf. Connector J21 delivers power to the standby
modules (in right-hand side of control shelf) and J22 to the main modules
(in left-hand side of control shelf).
5 V Remote Sense (J23) - monitors the +5 VDC output at a remote point,
typically the line or data shelf located furthest away from the modular
power system.
L/S 1 to 8 (J24 to J31) - each connector delivers power to one line shelf, to
one data shelf, or to one line/data shelf.
TX - RX (J32 to J35) - each pair of connectors delivers power to one
transceiver shelf. The latter could be housing transceivers, NEMs, or a
combination of the two.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-163
Back Panel Connectors (continued)
SOURCE 2
GND GND
SOURCE 1
INTERRACK
BUFFER
J19 J20
J
1
3
J
1
8
L1
TCL2
J21
TCL1
J22
5V
REM SENSE
J23
C1
AC2
J36
AC1
J37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
J24 J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31
J32 J33 J34 J35
J38 J39 J40 J41
J42
J44
CUSTOMER
ALARMS
J43
P/S FAIL
ALARM
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
TB & RNG
MODULAR POWER SYSTEM
1 1
L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S L/S
TX - RX
1 1 1 1
1
MPS-02.DS4
AC1 (J37) & AC2 (J36) - connect up to two AC power sources to the
modular power system. Both power sources must deliver identical output
voltages, either 120 or 240 VAC.
TB & RNG (J38 to J41) - each connector delivers talk battery and ringing
voltages to one line shelf or to one line/data shelf on a rack-mounted
remote station.
J42 (summed alarm) - reports the status of the modular power system to
the system control shelf (on central stations) or to the controller module (on
remote stations).
CUSTOMER ALARMS (J44) - each pair of terminals on connector J44 is an
input for a customer-defined alarm. Up to four such alarms can be
connected to a modular power system on a rack-mounted remote station.
(The central station does not handle customer alarms.)
The alarmed state, normally closed or normally open, of each customer
alarm is set on the test & alarm module.
P/S FAIL ALARM (J43) - provides a dry-contact output to extend the
alarm associated with the modular power system to a remote
alarm-monitoring centre.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-164 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM
RMO/RMR MPS Configuration

Configuration
Plug-In Position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RMO
Unprotected T-R Ctrl TA TbRs CB
Protected T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA TbRs TbRs CB CB
RMR
Unprotected T-R T-R Ctrl TA TbRs CB
Protected T-R T-R T-R Ctrl Ctrl TA TbRs TbRs CB CB

Legend:
CB Circuit Breaker Module TA Test & Alarm Module
Ctrl Controller Power Supply TbRs Talk Battery & Ringing Supply
T-R Transceiver Power Supply
Note:
The transceiver, controller, circuit breaker and test and alarm modules are similar
to the ones used at the central station. Please refer to the central station
modular power systemfor more information on these modules.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-165
Talk Battery Ring Module (e.g. 512645) - Simplified Block Diagram
-18 VDC
to
-72VDC
MODPSTB.DS4
80 VDC,15A
Circuit
Breaker
Voltage
regulator
DC/DC
CONVERTER
AND FILTER
Sine wave
generator
frequency
adjusted by
R57
(DC offset
of - 48 V)
DC/AC
CONVERTER
CURRENT
LIMITER,
SHUNT
REGULATOR
Alarm
-48V, 3A
TP
GND
TP
TP
RING CLK
RING OVERLOAD
90 Vrms, 50 VA
(or 75 Vrms)
RING MAIN
RING AUX
RING ENABLE
Green
Red
Alarm
Alarm
PTC
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
L
I
N
E
S
H
E
L
V
E
S
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
6
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M

T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
6
7
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
6
8
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
Setting the Nonalarmed State of Customer Alarms
Jumpers for
setting nonalarmed
state of external
alarms
SNSCA.DS4
SETTING NONALARMED STATE OF CUSTOMER ALARMS
Customer
Alarm
Number
Jumper Setting Nonalarmed State of
Customer Alarm
1 JP1 NC normally closed
NO normally opened
2 JP3 NC normally closed
NO normally opened
3 JP4 NC normally closed
NO normally opened
4 JP2 NC normally closed
(see below) NO normally opened
REPORTING CUSTOMER ALARM 4 or P/S FAIL ALARM
P/S FAIL JP5 ALM4 Customer alarm 4 will report a customer-defined
alarm.
P/S FAIL Customer alarm 4 will report a failure in the
modular power system. Therefore, you should not
connect any wires to the pair of terminals that
correspond to customer alarm 4.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-169
J1
TEST & ALARM
MODULE
OUT.RTN
+5V
-5V
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
+12V
+25V
-48V
CLK
S1
S2
IN.RTN
PS
ACO
512666TA.DS4
Test and Alarm Module (e.g. 512666) - Front View and Component Layout
LED Indicator
for P/S Alarm
Desactivated
J P1
J P3
J P2
J P4
J P5
+
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
7
0
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
MPS LED Indicators
SOURCE (yellow) LED
State Interpretation Required Action
ON The module is receiving the correct
input voltage.
None
OFF The module is not receiving the
correct voltage or is not connected.
Measure the input voltage. If it is within the
acceptable range, replace the module.
MPS SOURCE LED
PWR ON (green) LED
State Interpretation Required Action
ON The module is operating normally. None
OFF The circuit breaker of the module
has tripped or the module is not
powered up.
Reset the circuit breaker. If it trips again, proceed
as follows:
On a station equipped with standby protection, if
the second module did not trip, replace the first
module.
If the second module has also tripped or the
replacement module trips, verify for a possible
short circuit caused by a transceiver, an interface
shelf or perhaps another MPS module.
MPS PWR ON LED
ALM (red) LED
State Interpretation Required Action
ON The module is faulty. Replace the module.
OFF No alarm is reported. None
MPS ALM LED
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-171
RMO Cont rol and Transcei ver Shel f


SR500 Monitored Hot-Standby Protected RMO Control & Transceiver Shelf
SR500-s Course Notes
5-172 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM
Front View of a RMO/RMR Controller Module
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-173
RMO/RMR Controller Module
CR1 (red): RECEIVE SYNCHRONISATION
State Interpretation Required Action
ON The station is attempting to synchronise
itself with the receive signals. This should
happen only when the remote station has
just been powered up or reset and should
not last more than 160 seconds.
If this LED remains lit for more than 160
seconds, verify by replacement of the
RMO/RMR controller module, the repeater
controller module or the inbound receiver until
the problem is corrected.
OFF The station is synchonised. None
CR2 (red): AUTOTIME
State Interpretation Required Action
ON The station is being autotimed by the
central station. This should happen only
when the remote station or the central
station has just been powered up or
reset. The entire autotiming process
should not last more than 160 seconds.
If this LED remains lit for more than 160
seconds, verify that the station's address is
within the polling range set on the
interactive menus.
Verify that the coarse delay of the station
has been correctly set.
OFF The station is autotimed. None
CR3 (red): ALARM
State Interpretation Required Action
ON A problem exists in the transceiver or
the controller module.
Verify by replacement of the RMO/RMR
controller module, the repeater controller
module or the transceiver until the problem is
corrected.
OFF No alarm is reported. None
CR4 (yellow): TRANSMITTER BURST ENABLE
State Interpretation Required Action
ON The station is responding to
central station polls.
None
FLASHING The controller modules and
associated transceivers are on
standby in protected
configurations.
None
OFF The station is not responding to
central station polls.
If all the red LEDs on the RMO/RMR controller
module are off, check the power supplies.
If all the red LEDs on the RMO/RMR controller
module are on, verify the inbound receiver by
replacement.
If the red alarm LED on the inbound receiver is off,
replace the RMO/RMR controller module or the
repeater controller module or both.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-174 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM
RMO/RMR Controller (e.g. 511836) - Simplified Block Diagram
TX signalling(M)
Memory
RX signalling(E)
Memory
TX PCM Memory
64 PCM samples/trunk
MUX
DEMUX
MB0/MB1
TX memory
MB0/MB1
RX memory
MUX
Scrambler
DEMUX
(UW Detector)
Descrambler
RX PCM Memory
32 PCM samples/trunk
DATA
CLOCK
(PLL1)
614.4 KhZ
DTCLK
(PLL2)
96 Khz
or 112 kHz
EPROM
128K x 16
80C186
CPU
32 MHz
clock
Xtal
(CPU)
RAM
128K x 16
+
NVRAM
128K x 16
Maint.
&
Diag.
Mode
x100
x10
x1
DB-9
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
BURST CTRL
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
ring
relay
control
off/on hook
dial pulses
detector
off hook
during ring
detector
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
VF T S D
LOOP
ASIC
LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL
TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL
SLIMCON.DS4
EXT.
User
Alarms
TXODD
RXODD
DATA BUS,
ADDRESS BUS,
WR, RD, LCE
1/2
DSLAC
Dip Sw.
and
Operation
Mode
Switch
SUPER ASIC
DSLAC
and
DTMF
decoders
Tone Bank
I CC
CLOCKS FOR
DSLAC, etc.
Digital
Combiner
Digital
Splitter
8.192
MHz
Xtal
(DSLAC)
3.579
MHz
Xtal
(DTMF
decoders)
Not used
Intracall
Interface
TO THE LINE SHELF INTERFACE
RJ
12
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, -12VDC
-48VDC
RING VOLT. RING CLOCK
9.728
MHz
Xtal
(OPT)
TXDAT
RXDAT
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
(2 x 2.432 Mbps)
LEDS
Station
Address
Switches
Not used
/
4
/
11
RXEVEN
TO THE
RING GEN.
(4.864 Mbps)
(4.864 Mbps)
ALARMS
Fromthe
Arbitrator
E
x
t
.

R
e
s
e
t
T
C
L

E
n
a
b
l
e
S
w
i
t
c
h
D
u
a
l

P
o
r
t

A
c
c
e
s
s
.
.
Fromthe
Power Supply
.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
7
5
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
7
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
7
7
RMO Arbi t rat or Modul e
Front View of the RMO/RMR Arbitrator (e.g. 511825)
SR500-s Course Notes
5-178 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM

+5 volts
R
M
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
A

R
M
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
B
ARBITRATION
INTER-CPU
COMMUNICATION
ACTIVE CPU
SWITCH
RESET
SWITCH
RAM
CPU
SELECT
FLIP-FLOP
-ATCLEN -BTCLEN
WATCHDOG
TIMER
3 BYTES
COMP.
IF OK
RESET
BUFFER
AEXTRST
-BDPACC
BEXTRST
-ADPACC
( to control activecontroller)
( to control ARBIT. dual port RAM)
( to control RESET)
5 volts
SWITCH
POWER
ON
RESET
L.O.
IF NO
SYNC
SWITCH
COMMAND
FROM CPU
No options available
SR500s Rack Mounted Outstation (RMO) Arbitrator Module (e.g. 511825) - Simplified Block Diagram RMO825.DS4
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
7
9
RMO/RMR Line/Data Shelves


SR500-s Course Notes
5-180 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM

RMO/RMR Line Shelf Interface Modules



LINE/DATA
Shelf #
RMO LINE SHELF INTERFACE MODULE
ADDRESS SELECTOR SWITCH SETTING
1 0
2 1
3 2
4 3

Range of Line/Data Shelf Addresses for an SR500
Rack-Mounted Outstation/Rack-Mounted Repeater
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-181
LSI LED Indicators
A shelf interface module is located in position 9 in every interface shelf. The
following LEDs provide the status of the module:
CR1 (red): WATCHDOG ALARM
State Interpretation Required Action
ON A problem in the shelf interface
module has been detected by its
watchdog timer.
Replace the RMO/RMR controller module if it
has an alarm condition;
Replace the shelf interface module.
OFF No alarm is reported None
CR2 (red): COMMUNICATION ALARM
State Interpretation Required Action
ON No communication exists between the
shelf interface module and the
RMO/RMR controller module.
If CR1 on every shelf interface module is lit,
replace the RMO/RMR controller module;
If CR1 on one of the shelf interface modules is
lit, replace the module
OFF No alarm is reported None
CR3 (yellow): ACTIVITY
State Interpretation Required Action
ON Subscriber activity (i.e., ringing, off-hook,
etc.) is not occuring at the moment.
None
FLASHING Subscriber activity is occurring at the
moment.
None
OFF No communication exists between the shelf
interface module and the RMO/RMR
controller module.
Perform the same action as when the red
COMMUNICATION ALARM LED is lit.
SR500-s Course Notes
5-182 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM
SR 500s Rack Mounted Outstation (RMO/RMR) Line Shelf Interface (e.g. 511701) - Simplified Block Diagram
RMOLSI.DS4
EPROM
256K
80 C 186
CPU
Dual
Port
RAM
T
+5/-5 volts,
+12/-12 volts,
-48 volts
3
RX EVEN, RX ODD
RX SIGNALING (E)
RX DATA
TX DATA
TX SIGNALING (M)
TX EVEN, TX ODD
L
I
N
E
S
H
E
L
F
LOOP TESTER
RX EVEN, RX ODD
RX SIGNALING (E)
RX DATA
TX DATA
TX SIGNALING (M)
TX EVEN, TX ODD
TX INTRACALL
RX INTRACALL
TX CC TONE
RX CC TONE
ETC.
TX
TRUNK
COUNTER
LINE
CARD
ENABLE
R
M
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I/o
RX
TRUNK
COUNTER
6
DECODER
BUFFERS
TRANSCEIVERS
ETC.
T
RELAYS
4
TESTS
ANALOG
to
DIGITAL
2
6
16
CPU
clock
XTAL
32 MHz
RAM
256K
ADDRESS 0 FOR LINE SHELF #0
ADDRESS 1FOR LINE SHELF #1
ADDRESS 2 FOR LINE SHELF #2
ADDRESS 3 FOR LINE SHELF #3
COMMUNICATION ALARM LED (Red):
(NOCOMMUNICATION WITH MAIN CPU)
Same for
TX INTRACALL
RX INTRACALL
TX CC TONE
RX CC TONE
ETC.
Same for
LTSTTIP (A)
LTSTRING (B)
LVFTX0-LVFTX5
LVFRX0-LVFRX5
LCE0- LCE15
F
P
G
A
WATCH DOG ALARM LED (Red):
(LSI ALARM INDICATION)
ACTIVITY LED (Yellow):
ON=INACTIVITY ON SHELF
FLASHING=ACTIVITY ON SHELF
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
8
3
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
1
8
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n





S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
H
.
S
A
M
5
-
1
8
5
Customer Connections
SR500-s Course Notes
5-186 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM

A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
A
F
1 10
SR TELECOM
BATT GND
+ -
F
1 10
A
Wire Wrap Terminal Blocks

TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5
for VF Connections
TB1

VF & Alarm Connection Blocks
For connections, see the Rack-Mounted Remote Station Field Service Manual
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM 5-187
SR500-s Course Notes
5-188 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05H.SAM
Rack Mounted
Repeater (RMR)
Operation
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05I.SAM 5-189
OS
Transceiver
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-205
-Outstation Transceiver - Simplified Block Diagram
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, +12VDCNR,
+25VDC
MODULAT.
I
Q
DEMOD
SOURCE
RCV
FREQUENCY
AMPL.&
FILTER
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
LNA
FILTER AND PA MODULE
.1W (20dB)
XMT MODULE
RCV MODULE
-1.2dB
-1.2dB
RCV ALARM
XMT ALARM
NOTES:
DEPENDING ON PA OPTION
A PA IS MOUNTED ON THE
FILTER AND PA MODULE
ONLY WHEN A XMIT PWR
GREATER THAN 20 dBM IS
REQUESTED.
MTRSCVR.DS4
2
LOW
POWER
AMPLIFIER
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
(e.g.512370)
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
FREQUENCY
CONTROL
AMPL.&
FILTER
RCV
FILTER
XMT
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
-0.4dB
BURST
CONTROL
XMT POWER:
4W (36 dB)
1W (30 dB)
0.1W (20 dB)
RCV POWER:
-92dBm <Prx<-45 dBm
N.B. The +12 volts non-regulated
is used for the crystal oven.
INTER-
CONNECT
MOD/PA
INTERCONNECT
LO/MOD
BURST
CONTROL
RCV
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
(e.g.512375)
P.A.
+24dB GAIN (1.5 GHz)
+22 dB (1.7-2.5 GHz)
+20 dB (2.5-2.7 GHz)
XMT
OUT
RCV
IN
1
1
LO MON
TP (SMA)
LO MON
TP (SMA)
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
NO DATA Alarm
NO CLOCK Alarm
DEM Alarm
RF SENSE
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
PA
2
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
0
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
R
5
1
2
3
3
0
.
D
S
4
S
i
d
e

V
i
e
w

o
f

a

-
O
u
t
s
t
a
t
i
o
n

R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r

(
e
.
g
.

5
1
2
3
3
0
)
.
D
J
P
1
D
D
J
P
1
D
F
o
r

o
p
t
i
o
n

s
e
t
t
i
n
g
,

s
e
e

t
h
e

t
a
b
l
e
.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-207
T512110.DS4
H7
H8
H9
H10
B/ C +12V
-5V ALM
1
3
+5V
+12V
+12V
N/R
FREQ
ADJ
R12
R19
R23
R8
R33
R37
R40
R
4
7
R57 R56
R
Side View of a -Outstation Transmitter (e.g. 512110)
DATA
JP3
DATA
JP1 JP2
JP3
DATA
DATA
JP4
For option setting, see the option table.
J P1, J P2, J P4,J P5 and J P6 are for factory
testing only; they are inserted in normal
operation.
JP6 JP5
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
0
8
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
OS
Cont rol l er
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-209
-Outstation (-OS) - Simplified Block Diagram
TX signalling(M)
Memory
RX signalling(E)
Memory
TX PCM Memory
64 PCM samples/trunk
MUX
DEMUX
MB0/MB1
TX memory
MB0/MB1
RX memory
MUX
DEMUX
RX PCM Memory
32 PCM samples/trunk
SRT OSMD SRT OSFT
SRT UART SRT 076-510924
TX
framing
timing
EPROM
RX
framing
timing
EPROM
DATA
CLOCK
(PLL1)
614.4 KhZ
DTCLK
(PLL2)
96 Khz
or 112 kHz
(JP7)
EPROM
x2
80C186
CPU
CPU
clock
XTAL
25 mhZ
RAM
+
NVRAM
Maint.
&
Diag.
Mode
9.728 MHz
XTAL
Coarse delay,
data clock
( 48 or 56 Kbps)
JUMPERS
x100
x10
x1
DB-9
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
BURST CTRL
TXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
RXPCM
(4.864 Mbps)
ring
relay control
polarity
relay control
2W
to
4w
codec
dial pulses
detector
off/on hook
detector
ADRESS DIP SWITCHES
ASIC
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
M LEAD
E LEAD
TXEVE
VF T S D
ring
relay control
polarity
relay control
2W
to
4w
codec
dial pulses
detector
off/on hook
detector
ASIC
TRANSF.
+
RELAYS
M LEAD
E LEAD
VF

T S D
LOCAL
TERMINAL
RADIO
ALARM
CIRCUIT
MOSBD.DS4
EXTERNAL
ALARMS
ALARMS
T
R
A
N
S
C
E
I
V
E
R
ALM
ALM
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
TXEVE
TXODD
RXEVE
RXODD
CLOCKS FOR
CODEC, etc.
e.g. SD512070
e.g. SD512680
LINE TESTER
ADDRESS BUS, WR, RD , LCE
For options, see the Assembly Options Manual
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
1
0
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
OS
2- Wi re Modul e
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-211
S04\2-WIREMS.DS4
OS 2-wire Line Module (e.g. SD511725) - Simplified Block Diagram
PCM
IN
PCM
OUT
LOOP
TEST
CONTROL
RING(B)
TIP(A)
PWR0 - PWR3 (POWER CONTROL)
BATT
BATR
RNGT
RNGR
RING VOLTAGE
AND RETURN
-48 VOLTS
AND RETURN
RSM
TEST
CONTROL
ASIC
TDE
RCE
CURRENT
LIMITER
< 30 mA
PTT0 -PTT3
5V
0V
5V
DIP
SW.
ID1 - ID3 (2 WIRE TYPE CARD IDENTIFICATION)
LRXEVE
LRXODD
LRXINT
LRXTON
LELEAD
LMLEAD
LVFRX0 - LVFRX5
LRX2.4M
LTX2.4M
L128KHZ
L8KHZ
BUFFER
/DRIVER
CLOCKS
FOR
CODEC
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC, -12VDC
- 48 VDC
RING VOLTAGE
RING SYNC.
6LVFTX0 - LVFTX5
6
LTXEVE
LTXODD
LTXINT
LTXTON
LA01 -LA04
LD00 -LD07
-LWR,-LRD,-LCE 3
4
8
LD-1
(SLI C-2)
RI NG
RELAY
POLARI TY
REVERSAL
RELAY
CODEC
(M145502)
Other timing,
controls,etc.
TOTHE
LOOP
TESTER
TOTHE
RSM
TESTER
2 X
3
TRANS-
HYBRID
(2W TO 4W)
SLIC-1(600)
SLIC-3(900)
MUX
DEMUX
DEMUX
MUX
OPTION:
OFFHOOK
SENSITIVITY
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
U
S
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
RING SYNC
(from power supply)
A/D
D/A
N3DB0 - N3DB3 (ADD 3 DB PAD)
POLR0 - POLR1 (POLARITY CONTROL)
SRN0 - SNR3 (RING CONTROL)
OFFHK0 - OFFHK1 (OFF HOOK CONDITION)
ML0 - ML1 (DIAL PULSES)
OC0 - OC1 (OVER CURRENT)
LPT0 - LPT1 (LOOP TEST CONTROL)
RELAY0 - RELAY1 (RSM TEST CONTROL)
LOOP TESTER CIRCUITRY
4 TESTS
ANALOG
TO DIGITAL
RELAYS
For options, see the Assembly Options Manual
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
1
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
Not e:
Other line modules are available. For example, the 4-Wire RS module
(2 lines per module) SD 511731 may be installed in the Micro-Station.
Specific Micro-Outstation line module are also available for data services or
mixed services.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-213
SR500-s Course Notes
5-214 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
OS
(Indoor Version)
Customer Connections
SR500 Micro Outstation -
4-Wire User Connections for the Indoor Version
B
L
O
R
B
K
R
D
W
B
R
Y
L
G
R
H
For customer connections, see the Field Service Manual
S04\MICRO-8./DS4
MICRO-OUTSTATION
TO "VF 1"
OR "VF 2"
MODULAR
RJ-12
JACK
45.7 cm
(18 in.)
CABLE
MOUNTING
SCREWS (2)
COVER
SURFACE
MOUNT
JACK
4-WIRE
E&M
CABLE
MODULAR
RJ-12
M-LEAD
TIP 1 (a1)
RING (b)
SURFACE MOUNT
JACK
E-LEAD
RING 1 (b1)
TIP (a)
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-215
SR500-s Course Notes
5-216 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
OS
(Outdoor version)
Overview
SR500 Micro-Outstation - Typical Outdoor Installation
A B
D C
29.21cm
(11.500 in.)
C
POLE-
MOUNTING
BRACKET
S04\MICRO-4.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-217
TEST VF2 VF1
L N GND - + T R T R T1 R1 EM T R T1 R1 E M
110/220V
AC
12VDC
J1 J2 J3
FRONT VIEW RIGHT-SIDE VIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1. Antenna Connector (N-type)
2. Weatherproof Junction Box
3. Door Fastener
4. Junction Card
5. 120/240 VAC Input*
6. +13.6 VDC Input*
7. Test Input*
8. Liquid-tight Fitting for AC or DC Input Wiring
9. VF Line 2 Input*
10. Liquid-tight Fitting for Customer VF Wiring or
Junction Box - Station Protector Wiring
11. VF Line 1 Input*
12. Location of Power Switch, DC Input Fuse
(12 VDC @ 5 A) and AC Input Fuse
(120/240 VAC @ 1 A)
13. Junction Box Door
14. Label Outlining Junction Box Interior
15. Station Protector**
16. VF Line 2 Input Terminals***
17. Junction Box - Station Protector
Cable***
18. Ground Terminal
19. VF Line 1 Input Terminals***
20. Grounding Post
21. Mounting Brackets

* (Screw-type Terminal Blocks)
** (Shown attached to junction box
[for shipping purposes only])
*** (Associated only with 2-wire VF Applications)
SR500 Micro-Outstation Front & Right-Side Views (Outdoor Version Shown with
Junction Box Door Open and Station Protector Cover Open) S04\MICRO-2.DS4
SR500-s Course Notes
5-218 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
OS
(Outdoor version)
Customer Connections
SR500 Micro Outstation User Connections for the Outdoor Version
J2 J1
TEST VF2 VF1
L N GND - +
T R T1R1 T R E M T1R1 T R E M
S04\MICRO-5.DS4
JUNCTION
BOX
JUNCTION
CARD
INDIVIDUAL
CONDUCTORS
LIQUID-TIGHT
FITTING (SHOWN
DISASSEMBLED)
CABLE
110/220V
AC
12VDC
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-219
SR500 Micro Outstation - 2-Wire User Connections for the Outdoor Version
For the customer connections, see the Field Service Manual S04\MICRO-7.DS4
STATION PROTECTOR
TIP (a) RING (b)
VF 1
GROUND
TIP (a) RING (b)
VF 2
COVER
JUNCTION BOX-
STATION PROTECTOR
CABLE
RIGHT
SEAL
LEFT
SEAL
SR500-s Course Notes
5-220 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
Mi cro I I OS
Operation
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-1
Mi cro I I OS
The Micro II remote station is designed to provide full-featured voice and
data telecommunication services to isolated locations or individual
subscribers. It supports standard 2-wire and metered telephone, fax and
high-speed data. The Micro II provides two 64 Kbps PCM voice lines, or
two data circuits or a mixture of voice and data. It can also provide a single
ISDN basic rate access (2B + D) circuit.
The Micro II is a sealed unit that can only be opened at an authorised repair
centre. Its cabinet houses the RF transceiver, controller, power supply and
line interfaces. Customer access and connections are done on the Access
Module, which sits behind the station's access door.
Micro II Outstation
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-220-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM
As part of the SR500-s network, the Micro II has access to all 60 trunks on a
demand assigned or dedicated basis, and supports most system features
such as continuous quality testing (CQT), resistance only loop testing, BER
testing and RF level monitoring. However, Intracall and Common Channel
Signalling is not supported and an Auxiliary unit can not be connected.
A choice of 4 W, 1 W or 0.1 W transceiver can be factory set for the
outstation. Initial frequency ranges are from 1.3 to 2.7 GHz. AC or low DC
voltage is used to power the Micro II. A Power Pack is required for AC
operation which includes a battery backup. One of several available OEM
types of antennas can be connected using either N or DIN 7/16 RF (not
available anymore) connectors.
Micro II remote station features include:
programmable features and line interfaces
full compatibility with the SR500-s infrastructure
low power consumption
rugged design suitable for outdoor or indoor operation
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-3
Typical Micro II OS Site
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-220-4 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM
Capacit y
The Micro II outstation accommodates one or two of the several different
line and data interfaces required for the different telecommunication needs.
This next table is a list of interface options, including the respective line
capacities:
Interface Piggy
Back
Module
Lines /
Module
Lines
VF
2-wire POTS or semi-postpay 2 1 2
12 kHz prepay 2 1 2
16 kHz prepay 2 1 2
Data
ITU-T V.24 (EIA RS-232C) synchronous (2.4 - 64 Kbps) 2 1 2
ITU-T V.11 (EIA RS-422A) synchronous (2.4 - 64 Kbps) 2 1 2
ITU-T V.35 synchronous (2.4 - 64 Kbps) 2 1 2
G 703 ITU-T G.703 (64 Kbps) co- or contra-directional 64Kbps 2 1 2
DSU V.35 or X.21 Synchronous * 2 1 2
* Note:
The combined data rate must not exceed 384 Kbps.
Interface Options and Line Capacities
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-5
Specif icat ions
Dimensions (approximate) Including mounting
bracket:
Micro II
Power Pack
50 cm H x 28 cm W x 15 cm D
(20 in. H x 11 in. W x 6 in. D)
22 cm H x 28 cm W x 15 cm D
(8 in. H x 11 in. W x 6 in. D)
Input voltage
(AC operation requires Power Pack)
13.6 VDC (+ or - 12 to 16 VDC)
120 VAC (80 to 130 VAC)
240 VAC (160 to 260 VAC)
Battery reserve 12 Ah with Power Pack
Frequency Bands 1.3 to 2.7 GHz
Receiver Operating Range -45 to -93 dBm
Receiver Sensitivity at
Antenna Port, Guaranteed*
-87 dBm for a BER of 1 x 10
-4
RF Output Power, Guaranteed* +20, +30 or +35 dBm
Antenna Connectors N or DIN 7/16 (no longer available)
Environment -30 to +55 C
95% relative humidity
* For the specifications of your specific version of
equipment consult the relevant SRT brochure.
Outdoor Micro II Specifications
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-220-6 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM
Micro II OS with Optional Power Pack
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-7

Micro II Layout Simplified Block Diagram
MICROLAY.DS4
Notes:
1. When the Power Pack is not used, the 13.6 VDC is taken froman external source. In this case, the AC Fail and P.S. Fail alarms
as well as the battery test and battery temperature leads are not used.
To turn the micro II unit power off, remove the fuse. 2.
Alarm2 is used for reporting a Power Pack open door alarmwhen the optional open-door sensor is
equipped.
3.
PIGGYBACK
(2-WIREor DATA)
POWER
SUPPLY
TRANCEIVER 1.5 GHz (514325) or 2.4 GHz (513975)
CONTROLLER
(513990)
(Note 2)
13.6 V
+
-
EXTERNAL
SOURCE
13.6 V
AC FAIL
PS FAIL
DOOR ALM
BAT TEMP
BAT TEST
EXT.
ALAM.
Alarms
to
controller
(Note 1)
To
controller
(Note 3)
ACCESS MODULE
(514205)
From the
Controller
P
W
R

(
g
r
e
e
n
)
A
L
M

(
r
e
d
)
O
P
E
R

(
g
r
e
e
n
)
To Power
Pack (optional)
4 A
FUSE
PIGGYBACK
(2-WIRE or DATA)
13.6 VDC
POWER
PACK
ALARM 1
ALARM 2
+
-
+
-
+
-
.
AC INPUT
Subscriber lines
OUT
.
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
2
0
-
8
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
M
I
C
R
O
2
.
S
A
M
Mi cro I I OS
Transceiver
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-9
Micro II Transceiver - Simplified Block Diagram
MICTRANS.DS4
+5 VDC , -5 VDC
+12VDC
MODULAT.
I
Q
DEMOD.
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
I
Q
XMT DATA
4.864Mb/s
4.864MHz
XMT CLK
RCV CLK
4.864MHz
4.864Mb/s
RCV DATA
XMT AND RCV MODULE
XMT
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
BURST CONTROL
XMT POWER:
4W ( +35 dBm)
1W ( +30 dBm)
0.1W ( +20 dBm)
RCV POWER:
-93dBm < P rx <-45 dBm
BUFFER
TX ENABLE
(BURST CONTROL)
RCV
BASE BAND
PROCESSOR
XMT
RF OUT
RCV
RF IN
VCO
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
TO /FROM
ANTENNA
RCV
FREQUENCY
SOURCE
(Synthesizer)
I
Q
ALARM
BB
AMPL.&
FILTER
OQPSK
OQPSK
-93.5 dBm
to
-46.5 dBm
50 or 130s
10 MHz
PA
RF
SENSE
(ALARM)
+
-
PA
LOW
POWER
AMPLIFIER
.1W (+20dBm)
+
-
LO OUT
TX LO OUT
PLL CLOCK
PLL DATA
PLL CLOCK
RX-STROBE
RX LO OUT
LNA
TP
RX LOCKED DETECT
TX-STROBE
PLL DATA
FILTER
DUPLEXER
TX LOCKED DETECT
Optional
RSSI
(Access Module)
{
BAND
SELECT
(1)
NOTES:
(1) Frequency band select circuit is hardware programmable and not part
of the base band processor (factory setting).
(2) The last P.A. is powered by -5 and +12 VDC
29 dB
PA MODULE
(note 2)
1
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
2
0
-
1
0
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
M
I
C
R
O
2
.
S
A
M
Mi cro I I OS
Cont rol l er
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-11
Micro II Controller (e.g. SD 513990) - Simplified Block Diagram
MICROCON.DS4
DB-9
TX DATA
TX CLOCK
RX DATA
RX CLOCK
SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD
PCB
LOCAL
TERMINAL
SUPER ASIC
(note2)
LEDS
ALARMS
RING
FREQ.
+5 V
-5 V
+12 V
-12 V
-48 V
13.6 V
Notes:
1. All the modules use a similar design as described in previous course notes. For the MSM module refer to SD 513116,
for G703 to SD 511755, for syncronous DATA to SD 512407 block diagrams.
The operation of the controller is similar to SLIM controller (SD 513260 / 261) except for common channel, Intracall, order wire
and auxiliary functions which are not used.
2.
PLL CLOCK
PLL DATA
TX STROBE
TX LOCK DET.
RX STROBE
RX LOCK DET.
BURST CTRL.
+70 v -120 v
60 VRMS
ACCESS MODULE
INTERFACE
ASIC
(note1)
VOICE
RADIO
SERIAL
PORT
WRITE
PROTECTION
CIRCUIT
FLASH
MEMORY
RAM
128 x 16
NVRAM
128 x 16
25 MHz
CLOCK
XTAL
(CPU)
80C 186
CPU
MSM VOICE
OR
DATA
PIGGYBACK
INTERFACE
MODULE
MSM VOICE
OR
DATA
PIGGYBACK
INTERFACE
MODULE
ACCESS
MODULE
DC TO
AC CONV.
DRIVER
(DATA)
DC TO DC
POWER SUPPLY
BAT.
SENSE VOLT.
RS 232
TRANSCEIVER
EXT.
USER
ALM.
8.192
MHz
XTAL
(DSLAC)
RESISTANCE
ONLY
LOOP TEST
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
2
0
-
1
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
M
I
C
R
O
2
.
S
A
M
Mi cro I I OS
Power Supply
DC input Voltage
The Micro II power supply is factory jumpered to accept positive or
negative input DC sources. The input source ground and the output
ground are common, and hence, the input source must be negative ground
for a positive input source, and positive ground for a negative input
voltage.
The input voltage range and specification is listed, in the following table
Item Nominal Voltage Voltage Range Low Voltage Cut
Off
1 +13.6 V +10 V to 17 V 10 V 0.4 V
2 -13.6 V -10 V to -17 V -10 V 0.4 V
Input Voltage Range
Reverse Voltage Protection
The power supply is protected in the case of an accidental reversed polarity
connection of the input source by a fuse which is accessible from the
Access Module. The fuse will open when the input source is reversed.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-13
Ringing Voltage & Frequency
The output of the ringing voltage is a sinewave. The AC component of the
ring voltage is 60 Vrms 10%, and the DC component is -24 V (-3 V/+0 V).
The ringing frequency is selectable by software. The selectable frequencies
is listed in the following table
Frequency
16.6 Hz
20 Hz
25 Hz
30 Hz
Optional Ringing Frequency
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-220-14 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM
Mi cro I I OS Ext ernal
Power Supply
Power Pack
The Micro II external power input is supplied by the Power Pack which
accepts 110 VAC or 220 VAC (jumper selectable, see the following table),
+/-20%, 47 to 63 Hz at connector J1. Operating temperature range is from
-30C to +55C.
AC Input
Position
Fuse
JP 1 JP2
110 V B B 1.6A
220 V A A 1.6A
Power Pack 110 or 220 V Jumper Selection
Door Open Switch
Position
JP3
Enabled A
Disabled B
Power Pack Door Switch Alarm Jumper Selection
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-15
MICPPPSU.DS4
AC FAIL ALARM
BATTERY TEMP.
P/S FAIL ALARM
DOOR ALARM DOOR SWITCH
NTC Thermistor
in-rush limiter
LINE
NEUTRAL
GND BAT. -
BAT. +
BATTERY TEST
*
TEMP. +
TEMP. -
LED
(Green)
Negative Temperature Coefficient
*
Micro II Power Pack Power Supply (e.g. SD 514495) - Simplified Block Diagram
JP3
A B
TEMPERAT.
SENSOR
EMI
FILTER
AC
FUSE
1.6 A
INPUT
TRANSIENT
SUPPRESSOR
(MOV)
AC / DC
CONVERTER
BATTERY
CHARGER
AND
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
POWER SUPPLY
FAIL SENSOR
BATTERY
12V, 12 AH
DC VOLTAGE
PROPORTIONAL
TO TEMPERATURE
AC FAIL
SENSOR
ACCESS
MODULES
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
2
0
-
1
6
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
M
I
C
R
O
2
.
S
A
M
Ext ernal Alarms
Two external alarms are available on the Micro II unit and can be
programmed either as normally closed or normally open. One of them
(alarm 2)* is used as cabinet door alarm (usually in the Power Pack), in this
case, both alarms have to be programmed as "normally open". The two
alarms cannot be programmed individually.
When the external power of the Micro II is supplied by the Power Pack, the
AC Power failure and Power Supply failure alarms can also be used (see the
Installation Guide). When the Power Pack is not used, these two alarms
should be ignored.
* For Access module (514145, 514205) the cabinet door
alarm uses external alarm #1, and for Access modules
(514146, 514206) , the cabinet door alarm uses external
Alarm #2.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-17
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-220-18 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM
Powering-up Micro II OS And Power Pack
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-19
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-220-20 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM
Programming
Parameters
For complete detail, regarding the programming of the Micro II
parameters, refer to II Installation Guide Power Up and Programming pages.
It is important to remember that all commands have to be entered in capital
letters and finished with a semi-colon and STORE must be typed to save
the new settings if any, in non - volatile memory.
Technical Training Documentation Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM 5-220-21
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-220-22 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\MICRO2.SAM
Power Pack
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-221
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
2
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
5
-
2
2
3
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
2
4
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m

t
o

t
h
e

S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
A
D
D
E
N
D
U
M
\
5
1
3
3
1
1
.
S
A
M
5
-
2
2
4
-
1
Addendum to the SR500-s Course Notes
5-224-2 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\ADDENDUM\513311.SAM
Fuses for
AC Utility Outlet/
Battery Warmer
Blanklets
10 A for 120 VAC Input
5 A for 240 VAC Input
AC Input
120/240 VAC
15 A
Alarm
Cabinet 1
Alarm
Cabinet 2
DC Output
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
PWR Conv.
Alarm
Signals
Battery
Charger
output
Utility Outlet
120/240 VAC
To PWR Conv.
120/240 VAC
Fuses for
Battery
30 A 32 V
Power Pack Connections
powpack1.eps
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
5
-
2
2
5
Feat ures
Security Hardware: The power pack can be protected against
unauthorised access via different means:
locking bolts;
padlock (not supplied); and
key lock (option).
Power Pack Alarms*: The power pack sends an alarm signal to the
remote station if any of the following alarm conditions occurs:
power pack door opened;
AC power source failure; or
power converter failure / battery fuse opened.
Low Battery Voltage Cut-Off: The power pack provides battery voltage
sensing. If the battery voltage drops below +10.5 VDC (for 12 V output
option) or rises above -42 VDC (for -48 V output option), the remote
station(s) will automatically turn off to prevent battery damage due to a
deep discharge. The remote station will turn back on once the batteries
are charged back to +12 VDC or -48 VDC.
1. *These alarms cannot be issued by an auxiliary power pack.
2. These alarms will use up three of the four external alarms the
remote station can report the central station.
3. The 4 external alarms are accessible from the LTB
4. For more details about the configuration of the alarms, please
refer to the HC installation Guide "Configuring Alarms."
SR500-s Course Notes
5-226 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
Configurations
Single Power Pack: A single power pack can power up to two remote
stations.
Up to two remote stations can receive alarms from the power pack
according to the number of remote stations that are connected to it.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-227
Configurations (contd)
Extended battery backup: Obtained by connecting an auxiliary power
pack to the standard power pack.
Only the remote station that is connected to the standard power pack can
receive alarms. These alarms are issued only by the standard power pack.

SR500-s Course Notes
5-228 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
Configurations (contd)
Standby protection: Obtained by interconnecting two identical standard
power packs.
A remote station can receive alarms only from the power pack that is
directly connected to it.

Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-229
Specifications
Input Voltage*
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; or
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Output Voltage*
+13.6 VDC (for 12 V option); or
- 54.6 VDC (for -48 V option)
Dimensions
Height: 59 cm (23 in.)
Width: 39 cm (15 in.)
Depth: 22 cm (9 in.)
* The input voltage and output voltage depend on
which type of power converter has been ordered with
the power pack

SR500-s Course Notes
5-230 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
Options
One or two 12 V, 35 Ah batteries (for 12 V output option).
Four or eight 12 V, 17 Ah batteries (for -48 V output option).
Battery warmer(s) with thermistor to regulate the battery temperature
and charging voltage. (Battery warmer[s] are required if the power pack
will be exposed to temperatures below 0C for more than 10 consecutive
days.)
AC utility outlet.
Key lock for preventing unauthorised access.
Cable (to connect a power pack to a second remote station).
Auxiliary power pack (with interconnecting cable) for extending battery
backup power.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-231
To remove the power supply
SR500-s Course Notes
5-232 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
Top-Access
PJP Operation
Not e:
The following section contains information originally prepared to support
training for the SR500 phase 1 equipment. The information contained in it
is generally applicable, however, the reader must take into account
possible changes that may have been invoked with the SR500-s equipment.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-233
SR500-s Course Notes
5-234 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
PJP
SRTelecom
AC-Powered PJP Shown with Two Battery Compartments
S04\ACPPJPB2.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-235
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
1/4" - 20 x 1" Hex-head Bolts (4 per cover)
Battery Compartment Covers
+12 VDC, 38 Ah, Batteries*
Power Converter & Power Converter
Compartment
1/4" - 20 x 1 3/8" Hex-head Bolts (2)
PJP Cover
PJP
Power Input Compartment
Gasket
Power Input Compartment Cover
1/4" - 20 x 1" Hex-head Bolt
Battery Compartment(s)*
*(Equipped only for AC-powered PJPs.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Removing PJP Input Compartment and Battery Compartment Covers RPJPPB2.DS4
SR500-s Course Notes
5-236 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM

BATT OUTPUT
Fuse
RJ 45 J ack for
PJ P Alarms and
Battery Voltage Sensor
AC INPUT
Fuses
07-07E.DS4
Top View of PJP
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-237
SR500-s Course Notes
5-238 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
PJP AC-DC
Power Converter
T3
+
+
+
+
L2
C
3
C6
J1 L1
C
3
0
C
2
9
C
2
8
R
4
2
U1
CR2
R5
CR5
+
Component Layout of PJP AC/DC Power Converter Module, 101-511820, version 01
511820-2.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-239
BATTERY WARMER
CONNECTORS (3-PIN)
+12 VDC, 38 Ah
Battery
Battery Warmer
(Optional)
Velcro Fasteners
Battery
Cushion
Battery
Compartment
Battery Power
Connectors (6-Pin)
Battery Installation S04\BATINST.DS4
SR500-s Course Notes
5-240 T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM
P
J
P
Prliminaire
PJPACPS.DS4
Convert. AC/DC.
and protection
option: 120VAC
or 240VAC
using JR1,JR2
Temperature
Detector and
compensation
Transistor Switch
isolated by
opto-coupler
Thermistor
To the battery
heating element
(optional)
LINE
NEUTRAL
GROUND
JP5
Battery(ies)
Fuse (30A)
13.6 VDC
Nom.
AC/DC Converter
AC input
fuse
PJP AC/DC Power Converter (e.g. SD 511820) and Power and Alarms Distribution board (e.g. SD511815)
- Simplified block diagram (Krone Connecting Blocks for Subsciber Lines not shown)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
Input Voltage
Detector
isolated with
opto-coupler
User Defined External Alarm #4
Open Crcuit
Closed Circuit
Detector
(isolated by
opto-couplers)
options:
Norm. Open (NO)
Norm. Closed (NC)
using JP1 to JP4
JP6
AC Fail
Alarm
AC/DC
Converter
Alarm
N.B. Alarm#2 may be connected to
an open door detector for cabinet OS
Fuse F1
User Defined External Alarm #3
User Defined External Alarm #2
User Defined External Alarm #1
Overvoltage
Protection
Oscillator
100KHz
Regulator
DC/DC
Switching
Converter
and Alarm Circuit
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
5
-
2
4
1
T3
+
+
+
+
L2
C
3
C6
J1 L1
C
3
0
C
2
9
C
2
8
R
4
2
U1
CR2
R5
CR5
+
Component Layout of PJP AC/DC Power Converter Module, 101-511820, version 01
N.B. Option: option 001: Input voltage is 110VAC (J R1and J R2 installed)
option 002: Input voltage is 220VAC (J R1and J R2 removed)
511820.DS4
S
R
5
0
0
-
s

C
o
u
r
s
e

N
o
t
e
s
5
-
2
4
2
T
:
\
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
\
T
C
-
D
O
C
S
\
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
\
S
R
T
5
0
0
S
\
C
O
U
R
S
E
-
N
\
S
E
C
0
5
J
.
S
A
M
Caut ion
If it is ever necessary to replace a fuse on a PJP's power panel, the
replacement fuse must be of the same type and rating as that specified
here.
PJP Power Panel
Type
Fuse
Designation Nominal Voltage Rating Type
120/240 VAC AC Input 120 VAC
240 VAC
6.25 A
3 A
3 AG, Slow
Blow
Batt. Output +13.6 VDC 30 A
PJP Fuse Type & Ratings
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC05J.SAM 5-243
I nt roduct i on
SR500s Overview
Basi c Concept s
Net work I nt erf aces
St at i on Operat i on
Hardware Settings on SR500-s System
Microwave Pat h Consi derat i ons
Conf i gurat i on Consi derat i ons
Installation Information
Faul t Management
Ref erences
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\INTERCAL. SAM
Issue: 5
Not e:
For information on Assembly options, please refer to the latest issue of the
SRT publication "Assembly Options - SR500-s System" (033-100180-009).
For the convenience of course attendees, this section includes selected
pages from the Assembly Options - SR500-s System manual. Please see the
documentation provided with your equipment for information relevant to
your modules.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC06A.SAM 6-1
SR500-s Course Notes
6-2 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC06A.SAM
Assembly Options
Reference Manual
033-100180-009, Issue 07
Remitirse a la seccin amarilla para la
versin en espaol.
Voir les pages bleues pour la version en
franais.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. All statements,
information and recommendations in this manual are believed to be accurate, but are
presented without warranty of any kind, express or implied. Users must take full
responsibility for their use of any products.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information
storage or retrieval system, without prior written consent from SR Telecom Inc.
The SRT, SLIM, HC, II, WL, RadioLynx, LANLynx and Insight logos and designs, SR,
SR500, SR500-s, SR500-i, Metropol PMP and SR Telecom are trademarks of SR Telecom
Inc. Other brand names used in this publication are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
2000, SR Telecom Inc.
All rights reserved. (0201)
Printed in Canada
Head Office
SR Telecom Inc.
8150 Trans-Canada Hwy.
St. Laurent QC H4S 1M5
CANADA
Tel: +1 514 335 1210
Fax: +1 514 334 7783
1 888 SRTELECOM (778 3532)
(U.S. and Canada)
www.srtelecom.com
Contents
033-100180-009, Issue 07 3
Contents
Overview ........................................................................... 5
Introduction .......................................................................... 5
Part number syntax.............................................................. 5
Option number syntax.......................................................... 6
Variable settings .................................................................. 7
Compatibility ........................................................................ 7
Adding or replacing modules................................................ 7
Assemblies by part number ............................................... 9
Assemblies by part name................................................ 18
Assembly Options Reference Manual
4 February 2001
Overview
033-100180-009, Issue 07 5
Overview
Introduction
This manual comprises component layout drawings
and option tables that together document all options
of major assemblies. You can use it to verify an
assemblys configuration.
Option tables document every possible option of an
assembly, including the components and jumper
settings required. Component layout drawings
show the location of components and jumpers.
Also given in this manual are explanations of
SR Telecom's part and option numbers. Guidelines
on assembly compatibility and for adding or
replacing plug-in modules are also covered.
Part number syntax
To identify its equipment, SR Telecom uses a part
number comprising three elements as shown in
Figure 1:
Prefix
Root
Suffix
Figure 1 Part number syntax
Prefix
Common prefixes are listed below:
Prefix Description
SD Schematic drawing
021 A fastened unit (e.g., an RF unit like a
demodulator or a piggyback card)
101 A plug-in unit (e.g., a module like the
CS CPU)
102 Model 2 of a plug-in unit
191 An assembly comprising several
fastened units (e.g., a receiver or a
transmitter)
Root
A unique six-digit number that identifies the
assembly.
Suffix
Identifies the assemblys model or option number.
Possible designations of model numbers are: M1 for
model 1, M2 for model 2, etc. Designations of
option numbers are treated separately hereafter.
Assembly Options Reference Manual
6 February 2001
Option number syntax
When an assembly can have various configurations,
a sticker is placed on the assembly showing an
option number. This option number indicates how
the assembly has been configured at the factory to
meet customer requirements.
Option numbers typically comprise six digits
preceded by the abbreviation OPT. As Figure 2
shows, each digit represents a specific choice.
An assemblys configuration is typically chosen
through jumpers. Occasionally, however, the
configuration is chosen using components, such as
resistors or integrated circuits.
Changing an assemblys configuration
In the field, you can change an assemblys
configuration only if it is chosen via jumpers or
DIP switches. If components are involved, then you
should order another assembly, specifying the
desired option number. (If you make the
modification yourself, any existing warranty
becomes void.)
NOTE: After changing an assemblys configuration,
change its option number to make others aware of the new
configuration.
Figure 2 Breakdown of an option number
Overview
033-100180-009, Issue 07 7
Variable settings
Some assemblies include jumpers or DIP switches
that allow you to select the setting of certain
features. Again, the option table of the assembly
indicates which features can be selected in the
field and the appropriate jumpers or DIP switches.
The option number of an assembly does not reflect
variable settings. Therefore, you must verify that
the desired features are selected before
substituting the assembly for another one.
Compatibility
As a general rule, you can replace a faulty
assembly by an assembly having the same part
number, option number, and variable settings.
When a one-to-one substitution is not possible,
then you should refer to the assembly listings
provided in this manual.
The assembly listings herein catalogue all major
assemblies and, for each assembly, indicate its
latest issue, its name, where it can be used, and if
it has been replaced. Note that MD indicates
manufacture discontinued, which means that
the assembly is no longer produced and has been
replaced by another; while AM means addition
and maintenance, which means that the assembly
is produced for add-on or maintenance needs
only.
On the assembly, the PCB issue is etched on the
printed circuit board, usually below the part
number. The SD issue is given on a sticker located
near the option number.
NOTE: If you are replacing an assembly, always ensure
that the substitute has the same configuration.
Occasionally, a configuration may be identified
differently on similar modules.
Adding or replacing modules
Following these simple guidelines when adding a
new module to your system or when replacing a
module with another.
Adding modules
1. Check that the system software supports the
application provided by the new module. If
the software does not support the
application, contact SR Telecom's Technical
Services Department.
2. Verify that the module is configured correctly
for the given application:
Note the module's part number and option
number, both located on the solder side of
the module. The part number is
silk-screened on the module, and the option
number is typed on a sticker, always
preceded by the abbreviation OPT
(e.g., OPT 530000).
In this manual, locate the corresponding
option table and verify the module's
configuration.
If the module is configured correctly,
continue with this procedure; otherwise,
refer to the subsection on Changing an
Assembly's Configuration, given on
page 6.
Using the same option table, verify that the
variable settings of the module are set
correctly.
3. Install the module in the station.
4. If the module you have just installed is a line
module, program its line addresses using the
dynamic line addressing feature.
Assembly Options Reference Manual
8 February 2001
5. If the module you have just installed is one of
the following, program it as explained in the
SR500 Interactive Menus Operators Guide.
Module Subsection
CS Intracall Telephone Directory Menu
Synchronous Data Network Interfaces Menu
G.703, 64 kbps Network Interfaces Menu
Telex Network Interfaces Menu
6. Connect the new telephone or data lines to
the exchange and subscriber equipment as
explained in the station's documentation.
Replacing modules
Follow steps 2 through 6 of the procedure Adding
Modules on page 7. Remember that the
replacement module must have the same part
number, option number and variable settings as
the module to be replaced. If this is not possible,
refer to the subsection on Compatibility (page 7).
I nt roduct i on
SR500s Overview
Basi c Concept s
Net work I nt erf aces
St at i on Operat i on
Hardware Settings on SR500-s System
Microwave Pat h Consi derat i ons
Conf i gurat i on Consi derat i ons
Installation Information
Faul t Management
Ref erences
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\INTERCAL. SAM
Issue: 5
Worksheet f or SR Loss/Gain Transmission Pat h Est imat e
TIM E MEMO RY CARD
CSOS-LOS.DS4
This is a typical estimate for a Central Station
to Remote Station link. This estimate is also
applicable for Repeater to Outstation/Repeater
links if the appropriate antenna types are used.
Central
Station
Outstation
or
Repeater
F
C
C
G
H
E
D
E
A
B
F Transmitter output power (ref. Table 3) _____ dBm
Loss Elements:
A Free space loss (ref. Table 1) _____ dB
B Central Station Transmission line loss (ref. Table 2) _____ dB
C Central Station connection loss (include splitter or switch) _____ dB
D Outstation Transmission line loss (ref. Table 2) _____ dB
E Outstation connection loss (include splitter or switch if any) _____ dB
Loss Total _____ dB
Gain Elements:
G Central Station Antenna gain (ref. Table 4) _____ dBi
H Outstation Antenna gain (ref. Table 4) _____ dBi
Gain Total _____ dB
Received Signal Level: ( P
transmitter
- Loss Total + Gain Total ) = _____ dBm
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-1
F
C
E
D
A
B
G
H
Table 1. Free-Space Loss (in dB) Versus Distance
Distance (km) 1.5GHz 1.8GHz 2.4GHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40

45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
90
100
110
120
95.9
101.9
105.5
108.0
109.9
111.5
112.8
114.0
115.0
115.9
116.7
117.5
118.2
118.8
119.4
120.0
120.5
121.0
121.5
121.9
122.8
123.5
124.2
124.9
125.5
126.0
126.6
127.0
127.5
128.0
129.0
129.9
130.7
131.5
132.2
132.8
133.4
134.0
135.0
135.9
136.7
137.5
97.5
103.5
107.0
109.5
111.5
113.1
114.4
115.6
116.6
117.5
118.3
119.1
119.8
120.4
121.0
121.6
122.1
122.6
123.1
123.5
124.4
125.1
125.8
126.4
127.0
127.6
128.1
128.6
129.1
129.5
130.6
131.5
132.3
133.1
133.8
134.4
135.0
135.6
136.6
137.5
138.3
139.1
100.0
106.0
109.5
112.0
114.0
115.6
116.9
118.1
119.1
120.0
120.8
121.6
122.3
122.9
123.5
124.1
124.6
125.1
125.6
126.0
126.9
127.6
128.3
128.9
129.5
130.1
130.6
131.1
131.6
132.0
133.1
134.0
134.8
135.6
136.3
136.9
137.5
138.1
139.1
140.0
140.8
141.6
SR500-s Course Notes
7-2 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
Table 2. Transmission Line Attenuation in dB
Cable
(in.)
Freq.
(GHz)
Cable Length (m)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1/2
1.50
1.80
2.40
1.0
1.1
1.4
2.0
2.3
2.7
3.0
3.4
4.1
4.0
4.6
5.4
5.0
5.7
6.8
6.0
6.8
8.1
7.0
8.0
9.5
8.0
9.1
10.8
9.0
10.3
12.1
10.0
11.4
13.5
7/8
1.50
1.80
2.40
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.2
1.3
1.6
1.7
2.0
2.4
2.3
2.6
3.2
2.9
3.3
4.0
3.5
3.9
4.7
4.1
4.6
5.5
4.7
5.2
6.3
5.2
5.9
7.1
5.8
6.6
7.9
1 5/8
1.50
1.80
2.40
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.1
1.3
1.7
1.5
1.7
2.2
1.9
2.1
2.8
2.3
2.6
3.3
2.6
3.0
3.9
3.0
3.4
4.4
3.4
3.8
5.0
3.8
4.3
5.5
Notes:
1) This table is based on the attenuation in dB per 100m of cable, at 25C.
2) SR-supplied transmission line is low-loss foam-dielectric coaxial cable for non-pressurized systems.
Table 3. SR500 Transmitter Gain
Frequency Band (GHz) Output (nom.)
W dBm
All 0.1 20
All 1 30
All 4 (approx.) 35
Table 4. Gain (in dBi) of SR-Supplied Antenna Types
Frequency
Band
(GHz)
Omni
Directional
or Sectorial
Directional
Horn Panel
Parabolic
0.6m
2'
1.2m
4'
1.8m
6'
2.4m
8'
3.0m
10'
1.5 10 17 17.5 - 23 26.5 29 31
1.8 10 - - 19.5 25 28.8 31 33
2.4 10 20 17.5 20.8 26.5 31 32.6 34.5
Note: dBi = dB referred to isotropic radiator.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-3
Some Formula Used In Net Pat h Loss Calculat ion
FSL = 92.5 + 20 log
10
d + 20 log
10
F
FSL = 96.6 + 20 log
10
D + 20 log
10
F
FSL = Free space loss (dB)
d= Distance in kilometers
D = Distance in miles
F = Frequency in GHz
G = 20 log
10
F + 20 log
10
D + 17.8
G = 20 log
10
F + 20 log
10
d + 7.5
G = Parabolic Antenna Gain (55% efficiency)
D = Diameter in meters
d = Diameter in feet
F = GHz
TLL = Central Station TLL + Outstation TLL
TLL = Transmission Line Loss (dB)
NPL = FSL + TLL + MML - TAG
NPL = Net Path Loss (dB)
NPL = Span Loss
NPL = Section Loss
NPL = Loss from XMT output to RCV Input
FSL = Free Space Loss (dB)
TLL = Transmission Line Loss (dB)
MML = Maintenance Margin (dB)
TAG = Total Antenna Gains (dB)
RCVS = XMTS - NPL
RCVS = Receiver Signal Strength (dBm)
XMTS= Transmitter Signal Strength (dBm)
NPL = Net Path Loss (dB)
dBm = 10Log
10
Power (mW)
1 mW

e.g. 1W = 1000 mW = 10Log
10
1000 = 30dBm
1 mW 1 mW
SR500-s Course Notes
7-4 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
Obst ruct ions
A) Smooth Surface Grazing Obstruction
RADIO BEAM CENTER GRAZING
SIDE VIEW
END VIEW
CLEAR SIGNAL
RADIO BEAM CENTER
OBSTRUCTED
SIGNAL
EARTH CURVE
SSGOBST.DS4
B) Knife Edge Grazing Obstruction
GRAZING
MINIMUM LOSS 6dB
END VIEW
CLEAR SIGNAL
RADIO BEAM CENTER
OBSTRUCTED
SIGNAL
TRANSVERSE
KNIFE EDGE
SIDE VIEW KEGOBST.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-5
C) Trees at Grazing
GRAZING
MINIMUM LOSS 6 dB
GRAZING
DIFFRACTION
LOSS
MINIMUM LOSS 6 dB
TREEGAL.DS4
Trees at grazing act like a knife edge obstruction at grazing and produce
6 Loss.
D) Trees Above Grazing
BLOCKING
TREEBPC.DS4
Trees blocking the path are considered as completely blocking the radio
path and no signal passes.
E) Trees Below Grazing
LOSS 0 dB
TREEGPN.DS4
Tree below grazing provide no loss and actually help by absorbing any
potential reflections. Only the usual free space loss will affect the signal.
SR500-s Course Notes
7-6 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
F) Man-Made Obstruction
BLOCKING
LCTBOBS.DS4
Large cylindrical tanks as a blocking obstruction: The new construction of a
large storage tank may block all or part of a radio beam. K factor may
lower radio beam causing a tank to become an obstruction.
G) Large Cylindrical Tank As Diffracting Obstruction
DIFFRACTING
(Loss 6 dB)
LCTDOBS.DS4
A large storage tank may graze the side of the radio beam causing a
diffraction loss.
H) Large Cylindrical Tank As Reflecting Interference
INTERFERING REFLECTION
LCTRIOB.DS4
A large storage tank may reflect part of the signal (out of phase) into the
same system or into the antenna of another system.
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-7
Ref ract ion
The more a beam bends when it enters a material, the higher the material's
refractivity is said to be. Refractivity is indicated by a material's
Refractivity Index (No).
A) Passing from a more dense to a less dense medium, the beam is bent
back towards the more dense medium.
LESS
DENSE
MORE
DENSE
BEAM BENDS
TOWARDS THE MORE
DENSE MATERIAL
BBTMDMA.DS4
B) Passing from a less dense to a more dense medium the beam is bent
towards the more dense medium.
MORE
DENSE
BEAM BENDS
TOWARDS THE MORE
DENSE MATERIAL
BBTMDMB.DS4
LESS
DENSE
SR500-s Course Notes
7-8 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
C) Normal Refraction Bends Beam Down
RADIO BEAM BENDS
TOWARDS THE MORE DENSE AIR
MORE
DENSE
LESS
DENSE
NRBBDOW.DS4
D) Refractivity and Altitude (Elevation) affect the K Factor which is the
amount of bending the radio beam undergoes.
EARTH
L
E
S
S

D
E
N
S
E
M
O
R
E

D
E
N
S
E
RAAKFAB.DS4
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-9
USARMFB.DS4
U.S.A. Refractivity map.
SR500-s Course Notes
7-10 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
K Fact or (K)
KFSMEAM.DS4
2.0
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
10.000ft or 3050m
8.000ft or 2440m
5.000ft or 1525m
4.000ft or 1220m
3.000ft or 915m
2.000ft or 610m
1.000ft or 305m
Sea Level
Midpath
Elevation
K

F
a
c
t
o
r
Refractivity
200 300 400
K Factor Scaled for Midpath Elevation Above Mean Sea Level
Propagation Conditions
Perfect Ideal Average Difficult Bad
Weather Standard
Atmosphere
No surface
layers or fog
Substandard,
light fog
Surface layers,
ground fog
Fog, moisture
over water
Typical
Temperate
zone, no fog, no
ducting, good
atmospheric mix
day and night
Dry,
mountainous,
no fog
Flat, temperate,
some fog
Coastal Coastal, water,
tropical
K Factor 1.3 1-1.33 0.66-1.0 0.66-0.5 0.5-0.4
For 99.9 - 99.99 path reliability.
K Factor Guide
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-11
K=4/3
K=1
K=2/3
K=1/2
K=
K=4/3
K=1 (STRAIGHT LINE)
K=2/3
K=1/2
K=
KKREFRA.DS4
TRUE EARTH
RADIUS
True Earth Radius Versus Flat Earth
SR500-s Course Notes
7-12 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
K = Effective Earth Radius
True Earth Radius
K < 1 Beam is Bent Up
Short Path
High Towers
K =1 Beam not Bent (Straight)
K > 1 Beam is Bent Down Slightly
Longer Paths
Shorter Towers
Normal World Wide K Range:
K = 1.2 To K = 1.7
or
K = 6/5 To 17/10
K = 1.33 Normal K Factor
Used in Most Estimates
K = Beam is Parallel to True Earth Curve
Longest Possible Paths
Shortest Possible Towers
K = (-) Beam is Greatly Bent Down
Short Path
High Towers
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-13
Ref lect ions
The Fresnel zones are ellipsoids of revolution between the
transmitter and receiver on which a reflection would produce
signal addition or cancellation.
1
st
Fresnel Zone Radius
F
1
(m) = 17.35
d
1
(km) d
2
(km)
f(GHz) D(km)
F
1
= First Fresnel Zone Radius in meters or feet
d
1
= Distance from Antenna to Reflection Point
D = Distance from Antenna 1 to Antenna 2
d
2
= D - d
1
f = Frequency in GHz
1 2
F1
FZRADIU.DS4
d
1
d
2
D
N
th
Fresnel Zone Radius
F
n
= n
th
Fresnel Zone Radius
F
1
= 1st Fresnel Zone Radius
n = Fresnel Zone Number
Note: odd n = additive interference
even n = cancellation
SR500-s Course Notes
7-14 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
F
1
(feet) = 72
d
1
(miles) d
2
(miles)
f(GHz) D(miles)
F
n
= F
1
n
Ref lect ion Coef f icient (R)
R = -1.0 Very Reflective
(at F1 Add 6dB)
(at F2 Rcv Signal Cancellation)
R = - 0.3 Flat Land (Normal)
R = 0.0 Knife Edge
ATTVSPC.DS4
Fresnel Zone Numbers
1 2 3 4 5 6
Obstruction Zone Interference Zone
R

=

0
R

=

-
0
.
3
R

=

-
1
.
0
+10
0
-6
-10
-20
-30
-40
d
B

F
r
o
m

F
r
e
e

S
p
a
c
e
-1.0
C
e
n
t
e
r

G
r
a
z
i
n
g
0
.
6

F
1
-0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.0
Clearance / First Fresnel Zone
Attenuation Versus Path Clearance
+6
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-15
Met hods of Cal cul at i ng t he Probabi l i t y of Out ages Due
t o Propagat ion
r = Actual Fade Probability
Rayleigh Fade Probability
n = Rayleigh Fade Probability = 10
-F/10
Unreliability of Path:
Undp = a x b x 0.6 x 10
-6
x f x d
3
x 10
-F/10
Undp = a x b x 2.5 x 10
-6
x f x D
3
x 10
-F/10
Undp = Probability of outage using no diversity
(Unreliability, No Diversity Probability)
a = Terrain Factor: 4 Very smooth terrain, including
over water (high reflection)
1 Average terrain, some roughness
(average reflection)
1/4 Mountainous, very rough or very
dry (low reflection)
b = Climate Factor:1/2 Gulf Coast or similar hot, humid
areas (high refractivity e.g.
gulf No 385)
1/4 Normal interior temperate or
prairie northern (Normal
refractivity e.g. 340)
1/8 Mountainous or very dry (low
refractivity e.g. Nevada No 305)
f = Frequency in GHz
F = Fade margin to receiver input minimum (SR500 = -93dB)
d = Path length in kilometers
D = Path length in miles.
SR500-s Course Notes
7-16 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
Converting between reliability and unreliability:
Undp = 1 - Rndp
OR
Rndp = 1 - Undp
Undp = Probability of outage using no diversity (Unreliability,
No Diversity Probability)
Rndp = Probability of uninterrupted service (Reliability,
No Diversity Probability)
Converting between reliability and % reliability:
Rndp% = 100 Rndp
Rndp% = Percent probability of uninterrupted service
(Percent Reliability, No Diversity Probability)
Rndp = Probability of uninterrupted service (Reliability,
No Diversity Probability)
Note:
When solving for F (Fade margin) in the Undp formula:
Undp = a b 0.6 10
-6
f d
3
10
-F/10
Knowing that if x = y10
-n/10
then log
10
x = log
10
y - (n/10)
For x= Undp and y=(a b 0.6 10
-6
f d
3
)
then log
10
(Undp) =log
10
( a b 0.6 10
-6
f d
3
) - F/10
and solving for F
F = 10 [ log
10
( a b 0.6 10
-6
f d
3
) - (log
10
Undp)]
Technical Training Documentation SR500-s Course Notes
C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM 7-17
RELIABILITY % OUTAGE TIME % OUTAGE TIME PER
YEAR MONTH (Avg.) DAY (Avg.)
0 100 8,760 hours 720 hours 24 hours
50 50 4,380 hours 360 hours 12 hours
80 20 1,752 hours 144 hours 4.8 hours
90 10 876 hours 72 hours 2.4 hours
95 5 438 hours 36 hours 1.2 hours
98 2 175 hours 14 hours 29 minutes
99 1 88 hours 7 hours 14.4 minutes
99.9 0.1 8.8 hours 43 minutes 1.4 minutes
99.99 0.01 53 minutes 4.3 minutes 8.6 seconds
99.999 0.001 5.3 minutes 26 seconds 0.9 seconds
99.9999 0.0001 32 seconds 2.6 seconds 0.1 seconds
Relationship between system reliability and outage time.
SR500-s Course Notes
7-18 C:\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\SEC07A.SAM
I nt roduct i on
SR500s Overview
Basi c Concept s
Net work I nt erf aces
St at i on Operat i on
Hardware Settings on SR500-s System
Microwave Pat h Consi derat i ons
Conf i gurat i on Consi derat i ons
Installation Information
Faul t Management
Ref erences
T:\TRAINING\TC-DOCS\ENGLISH\SRT500S\COURSE-N\INTERCAL. SAM
Issue: 5

Potrebbero piacerti anche